Scan Tool Operating Instructions - AK Automotive Training

OmiCheck 

Operating Instructions 

www.omitec.com

Part Number I319590 

EN - Issue 1 

OmiCheck 

Scan Tool 

Operating Instructions 

Part Number I?????? 

EN 

Issue 1 

© Omitec 2010 

© Omitec 2010

Contents 

Introduction 

Overview................................................................................................. 1 

Kit Contents ............................................................................................ 2 

Keypads.................................................................................................. 3 

Connection ............................................................................................. 4 

Applications ............................................................................................ 5 

Safety Precautions ................................................................................. 6 

Getting Started ....................................................................................... 7 

General Information................................................................................ 9 

EOBD 

What is EOBD? .................................................................................... 11 

Identifying Compliant Vehicles ............................................................. 12 

Diagnostic Trouble Codes .................................................................... 13 

Interpreting EOBD Fault Codes............................................................ 14 

Using OmiCheck................................................................................... 15 

FastCheck 

Introduction........................................................................................... 21 

Safety Instructions ................................................................................ 22 

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ........................................................... 24 

Airbag ................................................................................................... 27 

Climate ................................................................................................. 31 

EPB (Electronic Parking Brake)............................................................ 33 

SAS (Steering Angle Sensor) ............................................................... 49 

Service.................................................................................................. 53 

TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System)........................................... 69 

i

Contents 

Manufacturer Applications 

General................................................................................................. 77 

Audi, Seat, Skoda and Volkswagen ..................................................... 78 

BMW................................................................................................... 194 

Citroen and Peugeot........................................................................... 194 

Fiat, Alfa and Lancia........................................................................... 210 

Ford .................................................................................................... 215 

GM Opel/Vauxhall .............................................................................. 231 

Honda ................................................................................................. 233 

Land Rover ......................................................................................... 237 

Mercedes............................................................................................ 244 

MG Rover ........................................................................................... 245 

Mitsubishi............................................................................................ 247 

Nissan................................................................................................. 249 

Renault ............................................................................................... 250 

User Menu 

Overview............................................................................................. 255 

Security............................................................................................... 258 

Appendix A: Glossary 

Glossary of terms ............................................................................... 260 

Appendix B: Cables 

Cable Identification ............................................................................. 267 

Appendix C: Diagnostic Connector Locations 

Diagnostic Connector Locations......................................................... 271 

ii

Contents 

Appendix D: Manual Service Reset 

Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)....................................................... 285 

Alfa Romeo......................................................................................... 285 

Audi .................................................................................................... 286 

BMW................................................................................................... 287 

Citroen ................................................................................................ 289 

Fiat...................................................................................................... 296 

Ford .................................................................................................... 297 

GM Vauxhall/Opel .............................................................................. 298 

Lancia ................................................................................................. 299 

Land Rover ......................................................................................... 300 

Mercedes............................................................................................ 301 

Peugeot .............................................................................................. 302 

Renault ............................................................................................... 308 

Smart .................................................................................................. 313 

Volkswagen ........................................................................................ 314 

Volvo................................................................................................... 315 

iii

Introduction 

Overview 

1 

Introduction 

All new road vehicles and many older vehicles are fitted with one or more control 

modules that monitor and control aspects of the vehicle, e.g. Engine, Transmission, 

ABS, Airbag etc. 

OM1563 

The OmiCheck is a scan tool that connects to the vehicle's control modules via the 

diagnostic socket and enables the operator to extract information from the various 

modules. For instance fault codes and live data plus other data and functions 

supported by the control module. 

The OmiCheck is supplied with the software to interrogate vehicle systems that 

conform to the European On-board Diagnostics (EOBD) standard. The EOBD 

standard is designed to extract emissions related data from the power train system of 

the vehicle. This will be the engine controller, of which there may be more than one, 

and the transmission controller if this is electronically controlled. 

Other test applications are available for non-EOBD systems and a number may be 

loaded on to the OmiCheck along with the EOBD application. 

It is recommended that a first time user reads through these instructions and safety 

guidelines and becomes familiar with the layout and content prior to commencing any 

testing on a vehicle.

Introduction 

Kit Contents 

The OmiCheck is available in two different configurations, Service and Professional. 

Although the same components are supplied in both kits, the software is different 

between the two. 

OmiCheck Service and Professional kit contents 

The basic kit includes: 

1. OmiCheck. 

2. J1962 cable. 

3. USB cable. 

4. CD ROM. 

1 

OM1569 

2 

2 

3 

4

Keypads 

The OmiCheck is operated via the two keypads. 

Left-hand keypad 

Key Function 

Scrolls left and right. 

Right-hand keypad 

Provides context sensitive help (where available). 

Key Function 

Scrolls up within a menu or text. 

Scrolls down within a menu or text. 

Selects a menu option, Continue or Yes. 

Exits a menu or No. 

OM1571 

OM1570 

3 

Introduction

Introduction 

Connection 

1 

OM1568 

2 

1. 25- way D-type diagnostic connector socket 

The diagnostic lead connector is located on the bottom edge of the OmiCheck, 

and is used to connect the appropriate vehicle communications cable to the 

OmiCheck. See ‘Cables’, page 267. 

NOTE: Always secure the diagnostic cable with the fixing screws to prevent 

accidental disconnection of the tester during use. 

2. USB connector socket 

The USB connector socket is located on the bottom edge of the OmiCheck, and 

is used to connect to a PC to download software updates. 

4

Applications 

The OmiCheck can be used in two ways: 

Stand-alone Module 

5 

Introduction 

As a stand-alone module, the OmiCheck can read live data, and is able to read and 

clear DTCs. Power for the OmiCheck is supplied via the diagnostic connector and 

therefore does not require a separate power supply. 

Download Mode 

OM1566 

OM1565 

The OmiCheck can be used away from the vehicle to download software updates.

Introduction 

Safety Precautions 

The following guidelines are intended to ensure the safety of the operator whilst 

preventing damage to the electrical and electronic components fitted to the vehicle. 

Equipment - prior to commencing any test procedure on the vehicle, ensure that the 

tester, its harnesses and connectors are in good condition. 

Polarity - always observe the correct polarity when connecting the tester to the vehicle 

battery. 

Before carrying out testing on a vehicle, the following procedure should always be 

observed: 

• Check the handbrake/parking brake is on. 

• Check that neutral or park is selected. 

• Keep test equipment and harnesses away from HT leads. 

• Be aware of moving engine parts. 

• Do not run engine in a confined space without adequate ventilation. 

6

Getting Started 

7 

Introduction 

Power for the OmiCheck is provided by the vehicle's diagnostic connector. Once 

connected, the message “System Configuration. Please Wait...” appears briefly on 

the OmiCheck's display before displaying the current software version number. 

Unlocking New Units 

A new or updated OmiCheck requires a security code to unlock the specific 

applications. To register the OmiCheck and to obtain your security code, call the 

Product Support Team on +44 (0)844 665 7681 or complete the activation form and 

Fax to +44 (0)844 665 7605 or email support@omitec.com. 

You will require your serial number (located on the back of the unit) and product key 

(located on the front of the CD wallet). 

After obtaining your security code, follow this procedure to unlock your OmiCheck. 

1. Select ‘User Menu’ from the main menu. 

2. Select ‘Security’ from the user menu. 

3. Select ‘Enter Security Key’ from the security menu. 

4. Using the and keys, scroll through the alpha/numerical character list. 

5. Confirm each character by pressing the key. 

If you make a mistake use the key and enter the correct character. To 

re-enter the code from the beginning, press the key. 

6. When prompted to verify the security key, press to confirm. 

7. Power down the OmiCheck by disconnecting the power source. 

8. Reconnect the power supply to restart the OmiCheck. The screen should now 

show EOBD and a list of the applications included. 

Unlocked Unit 

When unlocked the main menu for the OmiCheck will be displayed listing all the 

applications available on your OmiCheck. 

NOTE: The applications listed in the MAIN MENU are dependent on the level of 

OmiCheck purchased. Extra applications can be purchased separately. For further 

details, please consult your distributor. 

9. Use the and keys to select the required menu function. 

Press to confirm the selection.

Introduction 

Troubleshooting 

Problem Check: 

Communication problems between 

OmiCheck and vehicle. 

NOTE: Typical message is "Data Link 

Error" 

Communication problems between 

OmiCheck and PC. 

NOTE: Typical messages are "No 

reply…Trying again" and "Comms Lost 

Check Cable". 

If communications still cannot be established, contact the Product Support desk for 

further assistance. 

8 

• Check application list for vehicle 

coverage and harness used (including 

switch settings if applicable). 

• Check correct system was selected 

from the OmiCheck menu. 

• Vehicle connectors are free from 

grease. 

• Connectors for bent or missing pins 

• Connections fully mate. 

• If cable requires external power from 

the battery. 

• Vehicle immobiliser is disabled. 

• Control module is fully reset by turning 

ignition off, waiting 30 seconds then 

turning ignition back on before retrying 

comms. 

• The OmiCheck is powered from a 12V 

dc power supply unit supplied or 

vehicle. 

• COM Port configuration is correct i.e. 

set to the COM Port that the unit is 

connected to. 

• If serial to USB drivers are installed (if 

required).

General Information 

Cleaning 

9 

Introduction 

To maintain the condition and serviceability of the OmiCheck, it is advisable to follow 

the cleaning procedures below 

WARNING: Do not use solvents such as petroleum based cleaning agents, 

acetone, petrol, trichlorethylene etc. These types of harsh solvent may 

seriously damage the plastic casing. Do not even spray or pour this type of 

cleaner onto a cleaning cloth. 

WARNING: The OmiCheck is not waterproof. Always dry the unit thoroughly 

after cleaning or if it has been subject to accidental spillage. 

The manufacturer recommends that you periodically inspect and clean the following 

parts of the OmiCheck: 

• Case 

• Display screen 

• Keypad 

• Adaptor cables and connectors 

To clean the OmiCheck, or any of its cables or connectors, apply a mild detergent 

solution to a soft clean cloth that has been suitably dampened. 

WARNING: Before cleaning, disconnect the OmiCheck from the vehicle. 

Display Screen 

During normal everyday use, the screen may become dusty or covered in grime. To 

clean the screen, always use a soft, clean, antistatic cloth. If any stubborn stains or 

marks remain, use a non-abrasive glass cleaner applied to a soft, clean cloth. Gently 

wipe the cloth across the display until the marks have been removed.

Introduction 

Specification 

OmiCheck complies with ISO/DIS 15031 Part 4 as an EOBD OmiCheck 

Voltage requirements - 8.0 Volts to 16.0 Volts DC 

Current requirement - 750mA max 

Display - 20 characters by 4 lines LCD with LED back light 

Operating Temperature range - 0°C to 50°C 

Declaration of Conformity 

The OmiCheck is CE marked and complies with the following directives: 

EN55022:1998 - ITE Emissions di(Class A) 

EN50082-1:1998 - Generic EMC Immunity 

EN60950:1992 - Safety Requirements 

FCC47 Part 15 - Radio Frequency Devices (Class A) 

A copy of the Declaration of Conformity certificate is available on request from the 

manufacturer or your supplier. 

10

EOBD 

What is EOBD? 

11 

EOBD 

The American Environmental Protection Agency and the European parliament have 

set targets for reducing the levels of pollution produced by passenger and commercial 

vehicles. In order to ensure that these targets can be met, manufacturers are required 

to build new vehicles which meet increasingly stiff emissions standards. The 

manufacturers must further maintain these emission standards for the useful life of 

the vehicle. In order to meet and maintain these standards the vehicles are fitted with 

On-Board Diagnostic systems which monitor the integrity and effectiveness of all 

emission related components. 

As vehicles are becoming more and more complex, many of the systems fitted to 

them are being controlled by electronic control modules. Most vehicles now have 

multiple control modules (e.g. Engine, Transmission, Body, Suspension, etc.) located 

at different locations on the vehicle. The On-Board Diagnostic systems are integrated 

into the vehicle control modules. 

With so many different vehicle and component manufacturers, a common interface 

was required to communicate with these control modules. In 1988, the SAE (Society 

of Automotive Engineers) created a standard that defined a standard diagnostic 

socket (J1962) and a set of diagnostic test signals. 

With the diagnostic socket and diagnostic signals agreed, another standard was 

produced that defined a universal inspection and diagnosis method to ensure that a 

vehicle is performing to Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) specifications. This 

standard is known as EOBD (European On-Board Diagnostics). 

The fundamental requirement for an EOBD system is that in the event of an emissions 

related component fault, a DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) will be stored in the 

memory of the control module responsible for that component, and a Malfunction 

Indicator Lamp (MIL) will illuminate on the vehicle's instrument pack to alert the driver. 

The DTC can then be retrieved using diagnostic equipment to determine the type and 

status of the fault.

EOBD 

Identifying Compliant Vehicles 

All petrol engine vehicles manufactured since 2000 should be EOBD compliant. 

Some manufacturers began incorporating On-Board Diagnostic systems as early as 

1994, however not all are 100% compliant. All diesel engine vehicles are expected to 

have support from 2004. This means that diagnostic information, related to vehicle 

emissions, may be extracted from the vehicle via the J1962 diagnostic socket using 

the OmiCheck. 

The OmiCheck can communicate with any EOBD compliant vehicle using one of the 

five diagnostic communication protocols defined in the standard. 

These are 

• ISO 9141 

• Keyword 2000 (originally a European protocol) 

• J1850 PWM (pulse width modulated) protocol used by Ford 

• J1850 VPW (variable pulse width modulated) used by General Motors in USA 

designed vehicles 

• CAN (controller area network) currently being legislated for and likely to be a 

principle diagnostic communication system in the future. A European protocol. 

It is normally possible to tell which is used on a specific vehicle by examining the 

diagnostic socket (as below), however the OmiCheck's software will automatically 

detect the protocol used on the vehicle to which it is connected. 

16 

8 

OM1038 

9 

1 

• If the diagnostic socket has a pin in the ‘7’ or ‘15’ 

position, then the vehicle uses either the ISO 

9141 or Keyword 2000 protocol. 


position, then the vehicle uses one of the SAE 

J1850 protocols. 


position, then the vehicle uses the CAN 

protocol. 

NOTE: Although there are different EOBD electrical connection protocols, the 

command set is fixed according to the SAE J1979 standard. 

12

Diagnostic Trouble Codes 

13 

EOBD 

Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are divided into mandatory and voluntary codes. 

Mandatory codes are allocated by the ISO (International Standards Organisation)/ 

SAE (Society of Automotive Engineers). Voluntary codes are allocated by various 

vehicle manufacturers and are manufacturer specific and in some instances, vehicle 

specific. 

ISO/SAE controlled diagnostic trouble codes are those codes where industry 

uniformity has been achieved. These codes were felt to be common enough across 

most manufacturer's applications that a common number and fault message could be 

assigned. All unspecified numbers in each grouping have been reserved for future 

growth. Although service procedures may differ widely amongst manufacturers, the 

fault being indicated is common enough to be assigned a particular fault code. Codes 

in this area are not to be used by manufacturers until they have been approved by 

ISO/SAE. 

Areas within each of the fault code blocks have been allocated for manufacturer 

controlled DTCs. These are fault codes that will not generally be used by the majority 

of the manufacturers due to basic system, implementation, or diagnostic strategy 

differences.

EOBD 

Interpreting EOBD Fault Codes 

Use the following rules to determine the basic meaning of an EOBD fault code. 

P Powertrain 

B Body 

C Chassis 

U Network 

The first character indicates which area of the vehicle the code applies to. 

0 Standard (SAE) code 

1 Manufacturer's own code 

The second character specifies the type of code: 

1 Fuel and air metering 

2 Fuel and air metering, specifically injector circuit 

3 Ignition system and misfire detection 

4 Auxiliary emission controls 

5 Vehicle speed control and idle control system 

6 Computer output circuit 

7 Transmission related faults 

8 Transmission related faults 

If the first character was 'P' (Powertrain) then the third character identifies the specific 

Powertrain system concerned: 

The last two characters identify the specific fault as seen by the on-board systems. 

14

Using OmiCheck 

Connection and Basic Operation 

1. Connect cable (SB100/10) to the OmiCheck and secure the fixing screws. 

2. Ensure the vehicle's ignition switch is in the '0' position. 

16 

8 

OM1038 

J1962 Diagnostic socket 

15 

EOBD 

3. Connect the OmiCheck to the vehicle via the J1962 diagnostic socket. This 

socket is usually located inside the passenger compartment. Refer to vehicle 

manufacturers' information for the exact location. 

Power for the OmiCheck is provided by the diagnostic socket. When connected 

to the diagnostic socket, the OmiCheck will perform an internal self test and then 

the screen will display the date of the current software version before displaying 

the main menu. 

4. Use the and keys to select the EOBD menu function. 

Press to confirm the selection. 

5. Turn the ignition on when prompted, then press the key to confirm. The 

OmiCheck will then attempt to establish communication with the vehicle's 

On-Board Diagnostics. 

If the vehicle system is not EOBD compliant or there is a connection problem, the 

"Please Wait" screen will be replaced with help screens. 

If communication with the On-Board Diagnostics is successful, then the display 

will report that the OmiCheck is checking the vehicle's Inspection/Maintenance 

(I/M) Readiness tests. 

NOTE: The vehicles ignition MUST be on for successful communication with the 

vehicle control modules. 

6. The tester checks to see which of the I/M Readiness tests have been run and 

successfully completed and then the screen will inform you of the status. Press 

the key to continue. 

NOTE: The OmiCheck will always check the status of the I/M Readiness tests 

before displaying the EOBD Operations menu. 

7. The screen will then give you the option of viewing the status of the tests 

performed on the emission related systems and their components. 

Press the key to display the results. 

Press the key to bypass the results and go to the EOBD Operations menu. 

9 

1

EOBD 

1. 

EOBD OPERATIONS 

MIL Status 

2. View DTCs 

3. Erase DTCs 

4. Live Data 

5. O2 Sensor Tests 

6. View Freeze Frame 

7. Non-Continuous 

8. Continuous Tests 

9. System Control 

10. Vehicle Info 

11. OBD Status 

12. System Readiness 

13. Print Menu 

14. General Info 

15. Tester Setup 

8. Use the and keys to select the required function and press to confirm the 

selection. 

Easy Reset Facility 

To reset the OmiCheck without disconnecting from the vehicle, hold down the , , 

& keys simultaneously. 

Menu Options 

Not all vehicle control modules will support all of the options available from the menu. 

If an option is not supported the OmiCheck will display either “Not supported” or “Not 

available”. This is a limitation of the software on the vehicle control modules and NOT 

a fault with the OmiCheck. 

MIL Status/MI Status 

'MIL Status' or 'MI Status' displays the status of the malfunction indicator lamp for 

each emissions related control module. If the status of the MIL is set to On, one or 

more DTCs will be stored in the vehicle's control modules and the instrument panel 

MIL will be illuminated. 

16

View DTCs 

17 

EOBD 

This option allows any 'Stored' or 'Pending' emission related DTCs (Diagnostic 

Trouble Codes) to be viewed. If any DTC is present, it will be displayed along with the 

identity of the Control Module (CM) that registered the fault. 

If more than one DTC is displayed, the required DTC can be selected by using the 

and keys. Press to select the DTC and display the description of the code. 

Dependent upon the DTC and the vehicle manufacturer, it may be necessary to select 

the manufacturer and possibly also the model of the vehicle to enable the correct 

description to be displayed. This setting will be retained while the OmiCheck is being 

used for EOBD operations but can be redefined or cleared under the 'Manufacturer' 

menu option. 

Erase DTCs 

This option will clear all 'Stored' and 'Pending' emission related DTCs, clear 'Freeze 

Frame' DTCs and associated data, clear Oxygen Sensor test data, clear 

'Non-Continuous' test results and reset the status of the 'System Readiness' tests on 

the control modules on the vehicle. The tester will then perform a 'Read DTCs' 

operation to verify that the DTCs have been erased. 

Live Data 

This option allows the user to view the current status of the emission system 

components on the vehicle and can provide a quick way of telling if a component is 

working correctly. 

The list of components monitored under 'Live Data' can vary between manufacturers 

and even between model.

EOBD 

O2 Sensor Tests 

EOBD has an optional mode for monitoring the oxygen sensor test results depending 

on the method used by the vehicle manufacturer to comply with the requirement for 

oxygen sensor monitoring. If the manufacturer does use this mode not all tests need 

to be supported. The tester will display the supported tests and the data associated 

with those tests e.g. Maximum sensor voltage for a test cycle (calculated). 

View Freeze Frame 

Freeze frame data is a snap-shot of live data that was stored in the control module at 

the moment a Diagnostic Trouble Code was recognised. If a number of faults 

occurred, then the freeze frame data stored is associated with the last fault to occur. 

The DTC that generated the freeze frame data is also displayed in the data. 

Non-Continuous 

Some vehicle systems are not monitored continuously during normal running 

conditions, e.g. catalysts and evaporative systems. These tests are manufacturer 

specific, so while the results of the test will be shown, the meaning of the results 

cannot. 

Continuous Tests (Pending DTCs) 

When the 'continuous monitor' detects a failure condition in an emission-related 

powertrain component or system, only once in a drive cycle, it stores a 'Pending' code 

in the control module's memory. If the continuous monitor detects the same failure 

condition during the next drive cycle, it registers a DTC and illuminates the MIL. 

System Control 

Components on the vehicle may be turned on and off, or pulsed to test their operation. 

These tests are manufacturer specific and are currently seldom supported in 

controllers. 

Vehicle Info 

Information is displayed relating to the vehicle. This may be the VIN, controller version 

numbers etc., but is not supported by all vehicles. 

OBD Status 

Indicates to the user whether or not the controller supports OBD requirements. Not all 

vehicles support this. 

18

System Readiness 

19 

EOBD 

When the ignition is turned on at the start of a test, the controller performs a number 

of tests on the system. If the conditions are not correct for the controller to perform 

the test e.g. if the engine is too cold, "Not Ready" status will be reported. Readiness 

test status is also offered for inspection after communications have been established. 

These may be reviewed or ignored until later. 

The tester allows the user to do continual reads of the status of the System Readiness 

tests i.e. whether the test is not supported, waiting to complete or has completed. This 

status can help a technician verify a repair in that they can check that the readiness 

tests that may have generated a DTC have run to completion. The following sub menu 

will let the user display the results in two ways. 

The option ‘Show As A List’ will give the user the options of 'DTCs Last Cleared' and 

'Current Drive Cycle'. The selection 'DTCs Last Cleared' is normally found on all 

EOBD vehicles and shows the status since the last clearing of DTCs, but it may not 

be valid for the current drive cycle. The option 'Current Drive Cycle' will display the 

status of the tests for the current drive cycle, but this is rarely supported on vehicles 

at this time. 

The option 'All On One Screen’ will show an abbreviated text version of the status for 

all the tests since 'DTCs Last Cleared'. 

In both cases the tester is continually updating the status displayed for each test. 

Tester Setup 

1. 

SYSTEM READINESS 

Show As A List 

2. All On One Screen 

This allows the user to select the units displayed in Live Data and Freeze Frame from 

either metric or imperial. The user may also select from abbreviated text or full text 

phrases. For more information, see ‘Tester Setup’, page 256.

EOBD 

Main Menu Availability 

Manufacturer Specific Applications 

WARNING: It is recommended that you obtain an updated security key from the 

Product Support team before updating the software in your OmiCheck unit as 

the new software may not work with an old version key. 

The OmiCheck is delivered with a range of Manufacturer Specific Applications 

already installed, although some may not be turned on. To turn on an application, a 

"key" is required from Omitec. When the application pack is purchased, the purchaser 

will receive instructions for the application and information on how the application may 

be enabled along with harnesses that may be required for the manufacturer range. 

To enter the security key scroll up in the 'Main Menu', select 'User Menu' and then 

'Security', finally select 'Enter Key'. 

Enter Key 

When an application/upgrade is purchased, the application pack instructs the user on 

how to obtain the Security Key to turn on the application. The following keypad 

buttons are used to enter the key. 

& Scrolls through the possible characters to be used in the key. 

Accepts the character selected and advances to the next character 

location. 

Exits the change key function without saving the key. 

Moves backward through the key in the event of an error. 

Show Key 

Displays the current key that has been programmed into the OmiCheck. This controls 

the applications that are available to the user. The key is an alphanumeric code of 15 

or 20 characters. 

Software Version 

The software version of each of the applications installed is displayed. This 

information is likely to be required in the event of the user contacting the help desk. 

This menu item also informs the user what applications are installed if all have not 

been purchased. 

20

FastCheck 

Introduction 

21 

FastCheck 

The ‘FastCheck’ applications allow the OmiCheck to communicate with other system 

control modules on the vehicle, in addition to the standard emission related On-Board 

Diagnostic (OBD) functionality. 

There are currently seven applications that can be selected from the main menu. 

• ABS 

• Airbag 

• Climate 

• EPB 

• SAS 

• Service 

• TPMS 

The ‘ABS’, ‘Airbag’ and ‘Climate’ applications allow you to read and clear any fault 

codes stored by the selected system. 

The 'EPB' (Electronic Parking Brake) function allows you to read and clear any fault 

codes stored by the selected system and in addition can be used during brake 

operation checks or brake pad replacement. 

The 'SAS' (Steering Angle Sensor) allows you to read and clear any faults codes 

stored by the selected system, and in addition can be used to calibrate the steering 

angle sensor. 

The ‘Service’ application allows you to reset, dependent upon vehicle, the oil service 

interval indicator, service and inspection warning lights. 

The 'TPMS' (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System) function can be used to re-program 

tyre valves on vehicles fitted with Schrader TPMS valves. 

Connection to the specific system is via either the vehicle's J1962 diagnostic socket 

or by a system specific connector. Refer to the 'Vehicle Application List' to determine 

the correct connection point and interface cable.

FastCheck 

Safety Instructions 

WARNING: General Safety 

• All operations must be carried out in a well ventilated area away from open 

flame and heat sources. 

• Ensure the vehicle is stationary and the handbrake (parking brake) is applied 

before carrying out any maintenance/diagnostic work. 

WARNING: Air Conditioning Safety 

• Servicing must only be carried out if you are familiar with both the vehicle 

system and the test equipment. 

• Air conditioning refrigerant is a hazardous liquid and when handled 

incorrectly can cause serious injury. Suitable protective clothing, consisting 

of face protection, heat proof gloves, rubber boots and rubber apron or 

waterproof overalls, must be worn when carrying out operations on the air 

conditioning system. 

• Danger of asphyxiation, refrigerant gas is heavier than air and will collect in 

vehicle inspection pits or confined spaces, always recover all refrigerant 

from a damaged system before commencing work. 

WARNING: Airbag Safety 

• All work on vehicle restraint systems should be carried out by trained 

personnel. NEVER install accessories in the vicinity of driver, passenger or 

side airbags. 

• Observe component manufacturers instructions for safety, handling and 

installation of components. 

• Airbags are classed as explosive devices and as such are subject to national 

laws which must be followed. This includes storage and transportation. 

• ALWAYS store removed airbags in a secure area away from other hazardous 

materials. 

• DO NOT connect or disconnect any wiring with the ignition ON. ALWAYS 

turn the ignition switch to the 'OFF' position and allow at least 1 minute for 

the system to discharge. 

• NEVER expose system components to temperatures above 176°F (80°C). 

• ONLY use approved diagnostic testers to diagnose faults, NEVER use 

multi-meters or test lamps etc. 

• ALWAYS disconnect all airbags and seat belt pre-tensionless before using 

a multi-meter to check the wiring. 

22

WARNING: EPB Safety 

23 

FastCheck 

• Ensure that you are fully familiar with the braking system and it's operation 

before commencing any work. 

• The Electronic Parking Brake Control system may be required to be 

deactivated before carrying out any Maintenance/diagnostic work on the 

brake system. This can be done from the OmiCheck menu. 

• Only carry out maintenance work when the vehicle is stationary and on level 

ground. 

• Ensure that the Electronic Parking Brake Control system is reactivated after 

the maintenance work has been completed. 

NOTE: Omitec Group accept no responsibility for any accident or injury arising from 

the maintenance of the Electronic Parking Brake system.

FastCheck 

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) 

IMPORTANT INFORMATION 

Mercedes vehicles with Sensotronic Brake Control 

• Ensure that you are fully familiar with the braking system and it's operation before 

commencing any work. 

• The Sensotronic Brake Control system must be deactivated before carrying out any 

maintenance/diagnostic work on the brake system. This can be done from the 

OmiCheck menu. 

• Only commence work after the system has been deactivated. Upon deactivation, a 

warning message should appear in the instrument panel accompanied by an audible 

warning signal until the system is reactivated. If the warning signals do not occur, 

assume that the system is not fully deactivated and DO NOT commence work. 

• Ensure that the Sensotronic Brake Control system is reactivated after the 

maintenance work has been completed. 

NOTE: The manufacturer of the scan tool accept no responsibility for any accident or 

injury arising from the maintenance of the Sensotronic Brake Control system. 

Connection 

Using the Vehicle Application List on the CD-ROM, identify the required interface 

cable for the vehicle system to be tested. Connect the cable to the OmiCheck and 

secure the fixing screws. 

NOTE: If the vehicle being tested is a BMW with a 20 pin connector and an OBD-II 

connector, you must only use the 20 pin connector. 

Ensure the vehicle's ignition is OFF. 

Connect the OmiCheck to the required vehicle connector, refer to ‘Diagnostic 

Connector Locations’, page 271, for further information. 

Power for the OmiCheck is provided by the vehicle connector. Once connected, the 

OmiCheck will perform an internal self test and then the screen will display the date 

of the current software version before displaying the main menu. 

MAIN MENU 

1. EOBD 

2. FastCheck ABS 

3. FastCheck Airbag 

4. FastCheck Climate 

5. FastCheck EPB 

6. FastCheck SAS 

7. FastCheck Service 

8. FastCheck TPMS 

9. User Menu 

24

25 

FastCheck 

Use the and keys to select the 'ABS' application and press to confirm the 

selection. To return to the previous menu, press the 

Turn the vehicle's ignition ON. 

key. 

Use the 

selection. 

and keys to select the vehicle manufacturer and press to confirm the 

Dependent upon the vehicle and application being run, you may be asked to choose 

the particular system fitted to the vehicle. Select the correct system using the and 

keys and press to confirm. 

Select the required menu option using the and keys and press to confirm. 

The OmiCheck will attempt to establish communication with the vehicle system. If 

communication is unsuccessful, refer to ‘Troubleshooting’, page 8. 

Read DTCs 

1. Read DTCs 

2. Clear DTCs 

If any DTC codes are present in the system, a screen will be displayed informing you 

how many codes were found. This will then be replaced by the first DTC code. DTC 

codes are generated according to the vehicle and system manufacturer. 

DTC 1 - 38 Right Low 

Pressure Sensor 

Circuit Signal High{ } 

A typical DTC code 

The fault number is displayed first, followed by the DTC code. In this example the fault 

displayed is DTC number 38 - Right Low Pressure Sensor Circuit Signal High or Open 

Circuit. If the description text is too long to fit on the display, '[...]' appears in the 

bottom right corner of the screen. This indicates that the text can be scrolled using the 

and keys to view the rest of the description. 

To view the next DTC (if more than 1 was found), scroll to the end of the text and press 

the key. 

To return to the menu, scroll to the end of the text and press the key.

FastCheck 

Clear DTCs 

Diagnostic trouble codes can be cleared using the 'Clear DTCs' option. When using 

the option you will be prompted to turn the ignition off. Wait until prompted before 

switching the ignition back on. 

Start the engine to force the control module to run a system check. Verify that the 

code(s) have been cleared by selecting 'Read DTCs'. 

NOTE: Reading DTC(s) without first starting the engine will only confirm that the 

stored DTC(s) have been cleared. Faults may still be present in the system causing 

a DTC to be stored next time the engine is started. 

BMW Vehicles 

NOTE: To switch the ignition ON procedure for vehicles fitted with a start/stop, insert 

the remote key-fob fully into the ignition slot then press the start/stop button once 

(without any foot pedals depressed). 

26

Airbag 

27 

FastCheck 

Connection 










MAIN MENU 

1. EOBD 








9. User Menu 

Use the and keys to select the 'Airbag' application and press to confirm the 



key. 

Use the 

selection. 





1. Read DTCs 

2. Clear DTCs 



communication is unsuccessful, refer to ‘Troubleshooting’, page 8.

FastCheck 

Read DTCs 




The fault number is displayed first, followed by the DTC code. If the description text 

is too long to fit on the display, '[...]' appears in the bottom right corner of the screen. 

This indicates that the text can be scrolled using the and keys to view the rest 

of the description. 


the key. 

To return to the menu, scroll to the end of the text and press the key. 

Clear DTCs 




Verify that the code(s) have been cleared by selecting 'Read DTCs'. 

BMW Vehicles 




Some BMW vehicles are equipped with multiple airbag systems, one for each airbag 

fitted to the vehicle. 

Applicable Vehicles: 

BMW 3 series (E90/E91/E92/E93) 

BMW 5 series (E60/E61) 


BMW 7 series (E65) 

BMW Z4 (E85) 

If on selecting the Read DTCs or Clear DTCs and a multiple airbag system is 

detected, then a menu containing a list of airbag systems fitted to the vehicle will be 

displayed. 

Use the and keys to select the required system from the menu shown. Press the 

key to select the system required the Read DTCs or Clear DTCs will be performed. 

Press the key while the system menu is displayed to return back to the Read DTCs 

and Clear DTCs menu. 

28

29 

FastCheck 

All airbag ECU’s 

If the All airbag ECU’s was selected then the Read DTCs or Clear DTCs function will 

be performed on ALL detected airbag systems on the vehicle. 

Ford Galaxy (2006 -), Mondeo (2007-), S-Max (2006-), Transit (2006-) 

Crash Reset 

This option is necessary on vehicles where airbags have been deployed following a 

crash. The routine clears the crash flag in the Body Control Module to enable normal 

operation after repair of the vehicle and installation of a new airbag. 

Land Rover Freelander 2 (2007-) 

Restraints Build Mode Entry/Exit 

This function can be used to place the Airbag/Restraint system in to build mode, to 

enable safe maintenance and repairs to be performed without risk of airbag or 

pretensioner detonation. When work has been completed on the system, the Airbag/ 

Restraints system can be taken out of build mode to enable normal operation. 

Crash Reset 

This option is necessary on vehicles where airbags have been deployed following a 

crash. The routine clears the crash flag in the Body Control Module to enable normal 

operation after repair of the vehicle and installation of a new airbag. 

MINI vehicles 

NOTE: To switch the ignition ON for vehicles fitted with a start/stop button, insert the 

remote key-fob fully into the ignition slot then press the start/stop button once (without 

any foot pedals depressed). 

Renault vehicles 

Select the airbag system then select either 12-pin or 16-pin according to which 

connector is fitted to the vehicle under test.Then follow the on screen instructions. 

The following functions are available for the airbag system: 

1. Read DTCs: Displays all diagnostic trouble codes associated with the airbag 

system 

2. Clear DTCs: Clears all faults codes from the airbag system. 

3. Renault Arm/Disarm for Driver/Passenger Airbag: 

The Disarm CM (LOCK) menu option allows the driver airbag to be disabled 

preventing accidental deployment while working on the car. 

The Arm CM (UNLOCK) menu option causes the driver airbag to become active.

FastCheck 

The Disarm Passenger (LOCK) menu option allows the passenger airbag to be 

disabled preventing accidental deployment while working on the car. 

The Arm Passenger (UNLOCK) menu option causes the passenger airbag to become 

active. 

NOTE: Not all vehicles will have a passenger airbag and some vehicles with a 

passenger airbag cannot be armed/disarmed using a diagnostic tool (they require a 

key to be inserted into the arm/disarm lock located next to the passenger airbag). 

Vehicle notification methods for a locked airbag 

Method 1 - Fault Code present: 

If the user reads airbag diagnostic codes after an airbag has been locked some 

models will produce an 'Airbag locked' fault code. After unlocking, this fault code will 

not appear, this can be confirmed by reading the diagnostic codes again. 

Method 2 - Airbag MIL stays ON: 

After an airbag has been locked the Airbag Malfunction Indicator on the dash panel 

display will remain on, when the airbag is unlocked the MIL will switch off. 

Method 3 - Airbag MIL flashes for several seconds when turning the ignition on: 


display will flash for several seconds when the ignition is turned on, when the airbag 

is unlocked the MIL will switch off. 

30

Climate 

31 

FastCheck 

Connection 










MAIN MENU 

1. EOBD 








9. User Menu 

Use the and keys to select the 'Climate' application and press to confirm the 

selection.To return to the previous menu, press the 


key. 

Use the 

selection. 





1. Read DTCs 

2. Clear DTCs 



communication is unsuccessful, refer to ‘Troubleshooting’, page 8.

FastCheck 

Read DTCs 




The fault number is displayed first, followed by the DTC code. If the description text 

is too long to fit on the display, '[...]' appears in the bottom right corner of the screen. 

This indicates that the text can be scrolled using the and keys to view the rest 

of the description. 


the key. 


Clear DTCs 









BMW/MINI Vehicles 




32

EPB (Electronic Parking Brake) 

33 

FastCheck 

Connection 

Using the Vehicle Application List, identify the required interface cable for the vehicle 

system to be tested. Connect the cable to the OmiCheck and secure the fixing 

screws. 







MAIN MENU 

1. EOBD 








9. User Menu 

Use the and keys to select the 'EPB' application and press to confirm the 

selection.To return to the previous menu, press the 


key. 

Use the 

selection. 

and keys to select the vehicle manufacturer and press to confirm the

FastCheck 

Dependent upon the vehicle manufacturer and model different menu options will then 

be available. Function such as read and Clear DTCs will be available along with 

service functions. 

BMW vehicles 

NOTE: To switch the ignition ON for vehicles fitted with a start/stop button, insert the 

remote key-fob fully into the ignition slot then press the start/stop button once (without 

any foot pedals depressed). 

BMW 7 Series (E65) 

Parking Brake Bedding-in 

If the brake shoes of the ‘Duo Servo Brake’ are replaced then the bedding process 

must be performed to ensure correct operation of the system. The procedure may be 

performed on a roller test rig or on a road test drive. 

Automatic hold 

The Automatic hold function applies the brakes when the vehicle is stationary and 

applies the brakes and parking brake when the engine is switched off. This function 

can be disabled / enabled. 

Assembly mode 

Unintentional operation of the parking brake button before the Bowden cables have 

engaged in the wheel carrier can lead to assembly problems. Assembly mode 

suppresses the activation of the parking brake. 

Positioning travel check 

If excessive travel has been detected then a warning is displayed and fault stored. 

This procedure is used to determine the cause of the problem detected by the system. 

BMW X5 (E70) / X6 (E71) 

Workshop mode 

While in workshop mode the parking brake is placed into the opened position and the 

system is disabled. 

Parking Brake Bedding-in 

If the brake shoes of the ‘Duo Servo Brake’ are replaced then the bedding process 

must be performed to ensure correct operation of the system. The procedure may be 

performed on a roller test rig or on a road test drive. 

34

Ford – Electronic Parking Brake (EPB) System 

35 

FastCheck 

Two Electronic Parking Brake systems are currently supported on the service tool: 

Ford Focus C-Max 2003 - present: 

There are two test functions available under the calibration section of the EPB menu 

these are described below. 

Electronic Parking Brake Calibration Function Test 

Checks the Electronic Parking Brake is working correctly. This test should be 

performed after work has been completed on the Electronic Parking Brake or 

vehicles’ braking system. 

The test removes any air gap from the brake pads and checks the EPB pressure. 

Pre-Test conditions: 

• The vehicle must be stationary 

• The vehicle must be on level ground 

• The brake fluid level is correct 

The operator will be asked to perform a number of actions before applying the EPB. 

The OmiCheck reads and displays the EPB pressure. With the EPB applied the EPB 

pressure should be approximately 1100 Newtons. 

The operator will then be asked to unlock/release the EPB. The OmiCheck reads and 

displays the EPB pressure. With the EPB released the EPB pressure should be 0 

Newton. 

If either of the above tests fail (pressure reading not correct) the EPB assembly 

should be removed and re-assembled. 

Electronic Parking Brake Emergency Release Calibration 

Checks the Electronic Parking Brake emergency release is working correctly. This 

test should be performed after work has been completed on the Electronic Parking 

Brake or vehicles braking system. 




• The brake fluid level is correct

FastCheck 

The operator will be asked to perform a number of actions before applying the EPB. 

The OmiCheck reads and displays the EPB pressure. With the EPB applied the EPB 

pressure should be approximately 1100 Newtons. 

The operator will then be prompted to pull manually on the emergency release. The 

OmiCheck reads and displays the EPB pressure. With the emergency release 

activated the EPB pressure should be 0 Newton and the vehicle should be able to 

move freely. 

If either of the above tests fail then the EPB assembly should be inspected and 

repaired as described by the manufacturer’s instructions. 

Ford Galaxy (2006-), Mondeo (2007-), S-Max (2006-): 

There are three options in the PBM/EPB function menu which can be used to access 

various functions: 

Service Brakes 

There are three functions available under the ‘Service Brakes’ menu option: 

Enter Maintenance Mode 

This function is used to put the system into a state that enables work to be carried out 

by the technician. 

The Control Module puts the calipers into a state where normal operation is inhibited 

and the callipers can not be closed by any means.This function must be used if 

replacement of the brakes, discs or brake pads is to be carried out. 




• The vehicle must be secured with wheel locks 

This function takes 30 seconds to complete. 

NOTE: After this function has been performed the EPB calipers can not be closed and 

are inhibited until exit maintenance mode is run. Cycling the ignition, disconnecting 

the battery or diagnostics tester does not exit maintenance mode. 

Ensure the on screen instructions on the service tool are followed precisely and in the 

correct order. 

Exit Maintenance Mode 

This function is used to put the system back into an operational state after work has 

been carried out by the technician. Calipers are closed to the applied position, and 

normal operation is available again. 

36

37 

FastCheck 






This function also automatically performs an 'Assembly Check', which carries out 

internal tests on the Parking Brake system and reports the status (see below). Ensure 

the on screen instructions on the service tool are followed precisely and in the correct 

order. 

Assembly Check 

This function is used to check the operation of the parking brake system after any 

work has been completed on the system. 






NOTE: This test is automatically run as part of the 'Exit Maintenance Mode' function. 

It is not necessary to perform this function if the 'Exit Maintenance Mode' function 

reported no problems 

NOTE: This function can not be performed while the parking brake system is in 

maintenance mode. It should only be performed when the system is in normal 

operating mode. 



Actuators 

The following is available under the ‘Actuators’ menu option: 

Static Apply 

This function is used to test the operation of the actuators which operate the calipers. 

This function closes the actuators to the nominal parking brake apply position.

FastCheck 





It should be used if it is suspected that there is a fault with the Control Module, wiring, 

or the actuators (if the parking brake will not engage/disengage when manually 

operated). 

NOTE: This function can not be performed while the parking brake system is in 

maintenance mode. It should only be performed when the system is in normal 

operating mode. 

Configuration 

There are two functions available under the ‘Configuration’ menu option: 

Inclination Sensor Calibration 

This function is used to reset the stored zero value of the inclination sensor. It should 

be used when a new Parking Brake module has been fitted or a new Inclination 

sensor has been fitted. 


• The operator must NOT be inside the vehicle 



• Ensure the vehicle is not subject to any vibration (closing boot, bonnet, etc) 


NOTE: This function cannot be performed while the parking brake system is in 

maintenance mode. It should be performed when the system is in normal operating 

mode. 

Clear Stored Clutch Engagement Point 

This function is used to reset the stored value of the clutch engagement point. It 

should be used when a new Parking Brake module has been fitted or a new clutch 

has been fitted. This function is only applicable to vehicles with manual transmission. 

38

39 

FastCheck 




When this function has been performed successfully the Parking Brake module will 

re-learn a new clutch engagement point when the vehicle is next driven. 

NOTE: This function cannot be performed while the parking brake system is in 

maintenance mode. It should be performed when the system is in normal operating 

mode. 



Notes on Use of Functions 

The four functions are designed to be used in several different situations. Here are a 

few situations which may occur and the correct use of the functions to rectify the 

situation: 

Rear Brake Pad, Brake Disc or Caliper Replacement: 

1. If the vehicle requires any of the above components to be replaced the 'Enter 

Maintenance Mode' function should be performed. 

2. The system will be disabled to allow maintenance work to be carried out easily 

and safely. 

3. After the work has been carried out the 'Exit Maintenance Mode' function should 

be performed. 

Inclination Sensor Replacement: 

1. After the new sensor has been installed perform the ‘Inclination Sensor 

Calibration’ function. 

Clutch Replacement (manual transmission): 

1. After a new clutch has been installed perform the ‘Clear Clutch Engagement 

Point’ function. 

2. The vehicle will then learn the new clutch engagement point as the vehicle is 

driven. 

Parking Brake Module Replacement: 

1. After the Parking Brake Module has been replaced perform the ‘Inclination 

Sensor Calibration’ function. 

2. If the vehicle has manual transmission perform the ‘Clear Clutch Engagement 

Point’ function. 

3. The vehicle will then learn the new clutch engagement point as the vehicle is 

driven.

FastCheck 

Any other EPB system component has been replaced: 

1. DTCs should be read and cleared. 

2. The 'Assembly Check' function should be performed to check the operation of the 

parking brake system. 

3. If the 'Assembly Check' function fails, DTCs should be read again and the 

problem investigated. 

The Parking Brake will not engage when manually operated via the button: 

1. Ensure that the system is NOT in 'Maintenance Mode'. If it is, then perform the 

'Exit Maintenance Mode' function. 

2. Read DTCs, there may be a DTC stored which will indicate the area of the fault. 

3. Clear DTCs, there may be an intermittent fault on the system which needs to be 

cleared. 

4. Perform the 'Static Apply' function. This will send a command directly to the 

Control Module which will then close the actuators to the nominal 'engaged' 

position. 

5. Check the switch/button. 

6. Check the actuators themselves or the wiring from the ‘Control Module’ to the 

actuators. 

Land Rover - Electronic Parking Brake (EPB) System 

Discovery III (L319) (2005 - 2009), Range Rover Sport (L320) (2005 - 

2009), Range Rover (L322) (2006 - 2009): 

There are four functions available under the PBM/EPB ‘Service Brakes’ menu: 

Unjam Electronic Parking Brake 

This procedure should be used if one of the Parking Brake cables becomes detached 

or breaks whilst the vehicle is being driven. 



• The engine must be running and at idle speed 

After performing the procedure it is necessary for the technician to carry out checks 

on the condition of the rear brake shoes and drums. If both are OK the technician 

should then refer to the Land Rover technical information. 

NOTE: Part of this procedure is to place the Parking brake into ‘Mounting Position’; in 

order for the checks of the rear brake shoes and drums to be carried out. When the 

vehicle is in the 'Mounting Position' a red flashing light will appear on the instrument 

cluster. This indicates that the parking brake actuator is in the 'Mounting Position'. It 

does not indicate a vehicle fault. 

40

Mounting Position 

41 

FastCheck 

The park brake must be driven to the Mounting Position if any of the following 

procedures are to be performed: 

• Parking Brake Shoes - Removal/Installation. 

• Parking Brake Shoe and Lining Adjustment. 

This procedure must be carried out if, new parking brake shoes are fitted, new rear 

brake discs are fitted or if the vehicle has been mud wading (not water) for more 

than 50 miles. Or if one of the brake cables has broken or become detached during 

the vehicle being driven (in this case the Park brake is driven to the Mounting 

Position as part of the ‘Park Brake Unjam’ procedure above). 

• Changing of Parking Brake Cables (RH and LH). 

If the parking brake system has completed less than 50,000 cycles it is 

permissible to replace the parking brake cables. If over 50,000 cycles have been 

completed, then the cables can only replaced as part of the parking brake actuator 

and cable assembly. If a cable breaks or becomes detached whilst the vehicle is 

being driven, the 'parking brake unjam procedure' may be required. 

• Parking Brake Actuator - Removal/Installation 

The purpose is to allow the brake cables to be connected or disconnected to the 

brakes. 


• The vehicle must be stationary. 

• The ignition must be on (position II). 

• An approved battery charger must be connected to ensure consistent power 

supply. 

NOTE: To remove the parking brake from Mounting Position; switch the parking brake 

switch on and off twice. 

NOTE: When the vehicle is in the 'Mounting Position' a red flashing light will appear 

on the instrument cluster. This indicates that the parking brake actuator is in the 

'Mounting Position'. It does not indicate a vehicle fault. 


correct order.

FastCheck 

Latching Position 

This procedure may be necessary if the Parking Brake emergency release has been 

activated, in order to re-latch the Parking brake. 


• The vehicle must be stationary. 



supply. 



Longitudinal Accelerometer Calibration 

This procedure may be necessary if the Longitudinal Accelerometer has been 

replaced. 




supply. 

• Ensure the vehicle is placed on a level surface and that it remains stationary 

throughout the whole procedure. 

• Ensure the vehicle is stationary (0 km/h) on a level surface & no apply or release 

command has been received. 

• Make sure the parking brake module is correctly secured to the vehicle and that 

the parking brake is applied. 



MANUAL FUNCTIONS 

The following can be performed manually without the OmiCheck: 

Disable Parking Brake for Rear Brake Disc Change 

This procedure is necessary before carrying out work on the rear brake discs. When 

performed correctly the brake callipers are wound back by the control module: 

Manual Routine: 

• Turn the ignition key to position II. 

• Apply, and hold, the footbrake, 

• Apply, and hold, the parking brake switch to the RELEASE position. 

42

43 

FastCheck 

• Turn the ignition key to position 0 and remove the key. 

• Release the footbrake. 

• Release the parking brake switch. 

• Remove fuse number 8 from the BJB (to isolate the parking brake electrical 

circuit). 

This will ensure safe working conditions and eradicate the threat of the parking brake 

accidentally coming on while the technician is working on it. 

To Re-enable Normal Operation: 

• Re-install fuse number 8 into the BJB (to re-enable the parking brake electrical 

circuit). 

Parking Brake Shoes Bedding-in Procedure 

This procedure must be carried out if, new parking brake shoes are fitted, new rear 

brake discs are fitted or if the vehicle has been mud wading (not water) for more than 

50 miles: 

Manual Routine: 

• Start and run the engine. 

• Apply the footbrake 3 times within 10 seconds and hold applied after the 3rd 

application. 

• Apply the electronic parking brake switch 4 times, followed by 3 release 

applications within 10 seconds. 

Once the Service Bedding-in procedure mode has been entered, the electronic 

parking brake linings can be bedded-in by conducting 10 repeated stops from 30 

- 35 km/h (19 - 22 mph), followed by a 500 metre (547 yard) interval between each 

stop to allow the brakes to cool, using the electronic parking brake control switch. 

• The electronic parking brake force will be increased up to the dynamic maximum 

so long as the switch is held in the applied position. 

• If the switch is released to either the NEUTRAL or OFF positions, the electronic 

parking brake will be released, 

• The electronic parking brake MUST be allowed to cool between applications, 

either by driving at 19 mph (30 km/h) for 500 metres (547 yards) or remaining 

stationary for 1 minute between each application. 

NOTE: The electronic parking brake 'Service Bedding-in Procedure mode' will be 

active for the remainder of the ignition cycle, or until the vehicle speed exceeds 31 

mph (50 km/h). If the procedure needs to be re-entered, the entry actions must be 

repeated.

FastCheck 

Renault - Handbrake 

There are test functions available under the circuit tests section of the handbrake 

menu these are described below. 

Release Brakes 




• The engine must not be running 

The test requests the handbrake is released. The brakes will be released during this 

test once this test has been completed then the apply brakes function should be 

performed. 

Apply Brakes 




• The engine must not be running 

The test requests the handbrake is applied. The brakes will be applied during this test. 

VAG – Electro-mechanic Parking Brake System 

VW/Audi Electro-mechanic Parking Brake (EPB) system integrates two 

electro-mechanical actuators (Right and Left Parking Brake Motors) into the rear disc 

brake callipers. The EPB system replaces the traditional handbrake system. 

When the vehicle is stationary or when the EPB/Auto hold button is pressed the EPB 

control module activates the parking bake motors on the rear wheels holding the 

vehicle in place. 




• The brake fluid level is correct 

• The Parking brake is off 

NOTE: During the process of releasing and resetting the brake pistons the ECM may 

store DTCs in the EPB or ABS control modules. After completing the calibration 

procedure the EPB and ABS DTC memory must be cleared. 

44

EPB for Audi A4/A5/A6 & VW Passat/Tiguan 

45 

FastCheck 

Select the required option from the Maintenance menu either Replace Pads or 

Service Brakes then follow described sequence. 

Brake Pad Replacement/Service Sequence 

The EPB system must be deactivated and completely released and the ignition must 

be on. 

NOTE: The sequence must be performed in the correct order else the braking system 

maybe left in a non-operational state. 


Select the Release Brakes option from the menu. The brake pistons will now be 

moved to their released position. Wait until the OmiCheck displays the release brakes 

now complete message before continuing. 

Replace/Service the Brake Pads 

The brake pads can now be replaced or serviced following the manufacturer’s 

instructions. 

Close Brakes 

Select the Close Brakes option from the menu. The brake pistons will now be moved 

to their reset position. Wait until the OmiCheck displays the close brakes now 

complete message before continuing. 

Calibrate Brakes 

Select the Calibrate Brakes option from the menu. The brake pistons will now be 

moved in and out to calibrate their position. Wait until the OmiCheck displays the 

calibrate brakes now complete message before continuing. 

EPB for Audi A8 

Select the required option from the Maintenance menu either Replace Pads or 

Service Brakes then follow the required sequence. 

Brake Pad Replacement Sequence (Only) 


be on then follow the sequence described below. 

NOTE: The sequence must be performed in the correct order otherwise the braking 

system maybe left in a non-operational state.

FastCheck 

Replace Pads 

Select the Replace Pads option from the Replace Pads menu. The brake pistons will 

now be moved to their released position. Wait until the OmiCheck displays the 

release brakes now open for pad change message before continuing. 

Replace the Brake Pads 

The brake pads can now be replaced following the manufacturer’s instructions. 

Pad Thickness 

The brake pad thickness must be now be entered by selecting Pad Thickness from 

the Replace Pads menu. The current value is displayed on screen. Press the key 

to change value then enter the new value between 3-14mm. Press the key to test 

the new value a message will be displayed. Press the key to move to the store new 

value screen. Now press the key again to store the new value to the control 

module. 

Close Brakes 

Select the Close Brakes option from the Replace Pads menu. The brake pistons will 

now be moved to their reset position. Wait until the OmiCheck displays the close 

brakes now complete message before continuing. 


Select the Calibrate Brakes option from the Replace Pads menu. The brake pistons 

will now be moved in and out to calibrate their position. Wait until the OmiCheck 

displays the calibrate brakes now complete massage before continuing. 

Brakes Service Sequence (Only) 


be on then follow the sequence described below. 

NOTE: The sequence must be performed in the correct order else the braking system 

maybe left in a non-operational state. 


Select the Release Brakes option from the Service Brakes menu. The brake pistons 

will now be moved to their released position. Wait until the OmiCheck displays the 

release brakes now complete message before continuing. 

Service the Brakes 

The brakes can now be serviced following the manufacturer’s instructions. 

46

Close Brakes 

47 

FastCheck 

Select the Close Brakes option from the Service Brakes menu. The brake pistons will 

now be moved to their reset position. Wait until the OmiCheck displays the close 

brakes now complete message before continuing. 


Select the Calibrate Brakes option from the Service Brakes menu. The brake pistons 

will now be moved in and out to calibrate their position. Wait until the OmiCheck 

displays the calibrate brakes now complete massage before continuing. 

Volvo - Electronic Parking Brake (EPB) System 

Volvo S80 (2007 -), V70 (2008 -), XC60 (2009-), XC70 (2008 -) 

There are three options in the PBM/EPB function menu which can be used to access 

various functions: 

There are three functions available under the ‘Service Brakes’ menu option: 

Enter Service Mode 

This function is used to put the system into a state that enables work to be carried out 

by the technician. The Control Module puts the callipers into a state where normal 

operation is inhibited and the callipers cannot be closed by any means. This function 

must be used if replacement of the brakes, discs or brake pads is carried out. 




• The vehicle must be secured with wheel locks. 


NOTE: After this function has been performed the EPB callipers cannot be closed and 

are inhibited until exit service mode is run. Cycling the ignition, disconnecting the 

battery or diagnostics tester does not exit maintenance mode. 


correct order.

FastCheck 

Exit Service Mode 

This function is used to put the system back into an operational state after work has 

been carried out by the technician. Callipers are closed to the applied position, and 

normal operation is available again. 








Installation Check 

This function is used to check the operation of the parking brake system after any 

work has been completed on the system. 





Three internal tests are performed, each will report the status. If any of these tests fail 

to perform the Read DTCs function to detect the possible fault with the system. 


NOTE: This function cannot be performed while the parking brake system is in service 

mode. It should only be performed when the system is in normal operating mode. 



48

SAS (Steering Angle Sensor) 

49 

FastCheck 

Connection 




NOTE: If the vehicle being tested is a BMW with a 20 pin connector and an OBD-II 

connector, you must only use the 20 pin connector. 

Ensure the vehicle’s ignition is OFF. 






MAIN MENU 

1. EOBD 








9. User Menu 

Use the and keys to select the 'SAS' application and press to confirm the 



key. 

Use the 

selection. 


Dependent upon the vehicle manufacturer and application being run, you may be 

asked to choose the particular system fitted to the vehicle. Select the correct system 

using the and keys and press to confirm. 

1. Read DTCs 

2. Clear DTCs 

3. SAS Calibration 

Select the required menu option using the and keys and press to confirm.

FastCheck 


communication is unsuccessful, refer to ‘Troubleshooting’, page 8. 

Read DTCs 




DTC 1 - 38 Right Low 

Pressure Sensor 

Circuit Signal High{ } 

A typical DTC code 

The fault number is displayed first, followed by the DTC code. In this example the fault 

displayed is DTC number 38 - Right Low Pressure Sensor Circuit Signal High or Open 

Circuit. If the description text is too long to fit on the display, '[...]' appears in the 

bottom right corner of the screen. This indicates that the text can be scrolled using the 

and keys to view the rest of the description. 


the key. 


Clear DTCs 









50

SAS (Steering Angle Sensor) Calibration 

51 

FastCheck 

The steering angle sensor can be calibrated using the ‘SAS Calibration’ option. The 

on screen instructions must be performed to ensure the calibration process is 

correctly completed. 

NOTE: The steering angle sensor should be calibrated after performing wheel 

alignment or suspension adjustments. 

Alfa Romeo/Fiat/Lancia vehicles 

Steering angle sensor calibration 

On some vehicles there may be a steering angle sensor calibration routine available 

on both the ABS/TC/ESP control module and the Power Steering control module. If 

this is the case the technician should always perform the routine via the Power 

Steering control module. It will only be necessary to perform a steering angle sensor 

calibration via the ABS/TC/ESP module on these vehicles if the sensor itself or/and 

the ABS/TC/ESP control module have been replaced. 

Longitudinal acceleration sensor calibration 

This routine is necessary in the following situations: 

1. The Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor has been replaced. 

2. The ABS/TC/ESP control module has been replaced. 

3. The ESP system is not behaving as it should. Resetting of this sensor can 

sometimes cure strange ESP behaviour. 

BMW/MINI Vehicles 

NOTE: Procedure to switch the ignition ON for vehicles fitted with a start/stop, insert 



Ford vehicles 

Steering angle sensor calibration 

Ka II (2008 -): 

On these vehicles there may be a steering angle sensor calibration routine available 

on both the ABS/TC/ESP control module and the Power Steering control module. If 

this is the case the technician should always perform the routine via the Power 

Steering control module. It will only be necessary to perform a steering angle sensor 

calibration via the ABS/TC/ESP module on these vehicles if the sensor itself or/and 

the ABS/TC/ESP control module have been replaced.

FastCheck 

Fiesta (2008 -), Fusion/B-Max (2008 -): 

On these vehicles steering angle sensor calibration is performed via the Power 

Steering control module only. 

Ford Galaxy (2006 -), Mondeo (2007 -), S-Max (2006 -), Transit (2006 -): 

On these vehicles steering angle sensor calibration is performed via the ABS/TC/ESP 

control module only. 

Longitudinal acceleration sensor calibration: 






Land Rover vehicles 

Longitudinal acceleration sensor calibration: 






52

Service 

53 

FastCheck 

Connection 




NOTE: If the vehicle being tested is a BMW fitted with both a 20 pin connector and an 

OBD-II connector, you must only use the 20 pin connector. 

NOTE: If the vehicle being tested is a Mercedes fitted with both a 38 pin connector 

and an OBD-II connector, you must only use the 38 pin connector. 







MAIN MENU 

1. EOBD 








9. User Menu 

Use the and keys to select the 'Service' application and press to confirm the 



key. 

Use the 

selection. 


Dependent upon the vehicle manufacturer and model different menu options will then 

be available. 

Alfa Romeo/Fiat/Lancia vehicles 

There are potentially three options in the Service menu for these manufacturers:

FastCheck 

Service Interval 

This option resets the conventional service interval indicator. This function is to be 

used AFTER a full service (18000 miles for petrol or 21000 miles for diesel) has been 

completed on the vehicle. 

Oil Change Reset 

This option is currently only applicable to the new Fiat Ducato van (Ducato III MY2006 

onwards). This function is to be used AFTER an Oil Change has been completed on 

the vehicle. 

Oil Degradation Counter Reset 

This option is necessary on vehicles which have Diesel Particulate Filters (DPF) 

fitted. This is NOT necessary on vehicles with petrol or LPG engines or diesel engines 

if DPF is not fitted. When selected the OmiCheck will interrogate the vehicle to 

determine the applicability of the function. 

This function allows the resetting of the Oil Degradation Counter and viewing of the 

Oil Degradation parameters (number of resets, Oil Degradation Counter %, km until 

next reset required, odometer at last reset). The counter should only be reset AFTER 

the Oil has been changed. When reset the Counter will be reset to 100%, the number 

of resets will increase by 1. 

Alfa Romeo Vehicles Mannesman Dashboard (147 and GT - UK only) 

For Alfa Romeo vehicles with the Mannesman Dashboard (147 and GT) there is a 

problem with the Dashboard which causes the ‘Number of miles to Service’ value to 

be set to zero when a Service Reset is performed using the OmiCheck. 

When the Service Reset is performed the Dashboard stores the current mileage (or 

kilometre) value, read from the Odometer, in order to calculate when the next service 

is required. 

However, when the Odometer is shown in miles the calculation for the distance to the 

next service fails. This results in distance to the next service being displayed as zero 

and the Service Reset fails to be completed. 

To reset the Service Interval the following procedure must be performed: 

1. Switch the Ignition ON. 

2. Press the [MODE] button on the dashboard to enter the dashboard functions 

menu. 

3. Use the [+] and [-] buttons on the dashboard to navigate to the UNITS option and 

press [MODE] to select. 

4. Use the [MODE], [+] and [-] buttons to set the units to Kilometres. All other 

settings should be left unchanged. 

5. Use the [+] and [-] buttons on the dashboard to navigate to the END MENU option 

54

55 

FastCheck 

and press [MODE] to exit the functions menu. 

6. Plug the OmiCheck into the Diagnostic Socket and perform a Service Reset by 

selecting Service, Alfa Romeo, Mannesman then Service Reset. 

7. Disconnect the OmiCheck, leaving the ignition on. 


menu. 



10. Use the [MODE], [+] and [-] buttons to set the units back to Miles. All other 


11. Use the [+] and [-] buttons on the dashboard to navigate to the SERVICE option 

and press [MODE] to select. 

12. ‘Number of Miles to Service’ should now read approximately 12500 miles. 



14. Switch Ignition OFF. 

This procedure is necessary to ensure that the value read from the Odometer by the 

dashboard, when a Service Reset is performed by the OmiCheck, is in Kilometres. 

The Dashboard can then calculate the ‘Number of Miles to Service’ correctly. 

On the European Continent this procedure is not necessary as all dashboards are in 

Kilometres. 

BMW Vehicles 




Manufacturer Option 1 Option 2 

BMW CBS Service Options 

Digital Reset Oil Reset 

Distance Reset 

Time Reset 

Analogue Reset Oil 

Inspection Service 

Use the and keys to select the required menu option and press to confirm the 

selection. To return to a previous menu, press the key. 

The screen will display the message “BMW Reset” to confirm the reset process was 

completed successfully.

FastCheck 

Select Condition Based Service (CBS): 

NOTE: All required work must be carried out before service indicators are reset. 

Failure to do so may result in incorrect service values and cause DTCs to be stored 

by the relevant control module. 

NOTE: The DSC module will not recognise the replacement of the brake pad wear 

sensor before a terminal change has taken place. As such the DSC module will not 

allow reset of the brake pad service items. 

It is recommended that the brake pads are replaced with genuine BMW parts. The 

DSC module may not recognise a terminal change if using non-genuine brake pads. 

Select Condition Based Service (CBS) for vehicles only fitted with a J1962 16 pin 

connector and support Condition Based Service (CBS). 

Applicable vehicles: 






BMW X5 (E70) 

BMW X6 (E71) 

MINI (R55/R56/R57) 

NOTE: Refer to the ‘Vehicle Application List’ to determine the correct cable. 

Condition Based Service (CBS) is a system in which the vehicle calculates and 

monitors the status of serviced components and fluid levels as well as time and 

mileage based services. 

56

57 

FastCheck 

The following table displays possible service options together with the control module 

used to reset each option. 

Service Option Control Module 

Engine oil Engine (DME/DDE) 

Particulate filter Engine (DDE) 

Diesel additive Engine (DDE) Engine (DDE) 

Front brake pads Dynamic stability control (DSC) 

Rear brake pads Dynamic stability control (DSC) 

Micro filter Climate control (IHKA) 

Brake fluid Instrument cluster (INSTR) 

Coolant Instrument cluster (INSTR) 

Spark plugs Instrument cluster (INSTR) 

Vehicle check Instrument cluster (INSTR) 

Statutory vehicle inspection Instrument cluster (INSTR) 

Statutory exhaust emission inspection Instrument cluster (INSTR) 

The OmiCheck will automatically identify all control modules required during the reset 

process. If an unknown control module is found or communications cannot be 

established, the operator is prompted to either to continue or abort. 

NOTE: If the process is continued service options applicable to the unknown control 

module will not be available (see service option table). 

The current date and time information will be displayed by the OmiCheck. Press the 

key if the information is correct and continue or press 

information. 

key to correct the 

NOTE: If date and time used during the reset process is incorrect, this will result in 

incorrect service intervals. 

To change the date and time: 

Use the 

‘/ \’. 

and keys to change the value of the selected information indicated by 

Use the key to change the selected date/time field. 

Use the key to complete the information entry. 

The screen will display a final confirmation of the new data entered. Press the 

to program the new information to the vehicle. 

key 

Pressing the key at any point during the date and time change to will return to the 

initial date and time confirmation screen. No information will have been changed. 

The service options available on the vehicle are displayed as a list. Each option is 

displayed with the service data: 

The percentage reset value.

FastCheck 

The estimated distance too or the next service date. 

The service counter. 

NOTE: The vehicle inspection and exhaust emission inspection only display the date 

of the next service. 

The service option list is displayed in priority order, with the most urgent first. 

To reset an option scroll to the required option using the and keys. The current 

option will be indicated by the . Press the key to confirm the selection. 

Two possible options maybe displayed on the lower half of the display:- 

Reset option 

Correct option 

Use the and keys to select the required menu option 

Use the key to confirm the selection. 

Use the key to cancel the selection and return to the service option list. 

Reset Option: 

The Reset option is used to set the selected service option’s reset value to 100%. The 

estimated distance or date of next service and the service counter are updated. 

The vehicle inspection and exhaust emission inspection service options are statutory 

inspections that store the date of the next inspection. 

Upon selecting either of these options the OmiCheck will display the screen to change 

the next service date. 

Upon selecting either of these options the OmiCheck will display the screen to change 

the next service date. 

Use the and keys to change the value of the selected information indicated by 

‘>’ or ‘

Correct Option: 

59 

FastCheck 

The Correct option is used to correct a service option which has been reset in error. 

NOTE: Reset correction is only available for service options with service counter not 

zero, and is not available for vehicle and exhaust emission inspections. The original 

service option values are lost during reset. 

Use the and keys to change the reset value. 

Use the key to complete the information entry. 

A final confirmation of the new data entered is displayed. Press the key to store the 

new information. To cancel the correction and return to the service option list press 

the key. 

NOTE: The maximum reset value will be the current value of the selected service 

option. The service counter will be decremented by 1. 

Digital Reset: 

Select Digital Reset for vehicles only fitted with a J1962 16 pin connector and do not 

support Condition Based Service (CBS). 

The OmiCheck will display a message to confirm the reset process was successful. 





BMW X3 (E83) 

BMW X5 (E53) 

BMW Z4 (E85) 

NOTE: A manual procedure for service reset is possible for some Digital Reset 

applicable vehicles. Refer to Manual Service Reset section for instructions. 

Analogue Reset: 

Select Analogue Reset for vehicles fitted with a 20 pin round diagnostic connector 

within the engine bay. 

The OmiCheck will display the message “Reset complete” to confirm the reset 

process was completed. 

NOTE: The OmiCheck indicates the completion of the process only. Visual 

confirmation via the Service Interval Indicator (SIA) located on the vehicle’s dash 

panel is required.

FastCheck 

Annual Distance: 

The average annual distance travelled is required for the calculation of various 

Condition Based Service (CBS) functions. 

The annual distance is based on the distance travelled after approximately six to eight 

weeks from being reset. It is advised to reset the annual distance after any changes 

in the driving pattern of the vehicle. 

NOTE: Incorrect annual distance will affect the CBS intervals. 

The value will be set to a default (approximately 30,000 km / 18,640 miles) until the 

new value has been calculated. 







BMW X5 (E70) 

BMW X6 (E71) 

Battery Change: 

After fitting a new battery, the battery change function should be run. The battery 

change function registers the replacement of a battery with the power management 

system. Failure to do so may cause the power management system to operate 

incorrectly. 

The battery change application determines the required battery capacity and type 

from the Car Access System (CAS) module. The replacement battery must be same 

capacity and type as displayed. 

NOTE: Certain vehicles require the use of an Absorbent Glass Mat (AGM) battery. 







BMW X5 (E70) 

BMW X6 (E71) 

60

61 

FastCheck 

Ford vehicles 



fitted. This is not necessary on vehicles with petrol or LPG engines or diesel engines 

if DPF is not fitted. The counter should only be reset AFTER the oil has been 

changed. 

GM Vehicles 

Service Interval Reset 

CAN Vehicles - (Astra-H, Corsa-D, Signum, Vectra-C and Zafira-B) 

This function should be used after a vehicle has been serviced. 

The vehicle is programmed with the number of miles and days until the next service 

and the Service Indicator light is turned off. 

The Service Indicator will come on again when either the number of programmed 

miles is reached or the number of programmed days is reached, whichever occurs 

first. 

The reset is started by selecting the 'Service’ option. 

To return to a previous menu, press the key. 

The OmiCheck will communicate with the Instrument pack to determine the vehicle 

model. If the vehicle model is unknown the operator must manually select the vehicle. 

NOTE: Vehicle must NOT be moving during this procedure and all doors must be 

closed. The OmiCheck will check the vehicle speed to ensure that the vehicle is not 

moving before starting the procedure. 

Security Code 

To perform the reset the operator must enter a 4-digit security code into the 

OmiCheck. This code will be programmed into the vehicle to allow a Reset to be 

performed. 

The 4-digit security code is found in the owner’s handbook on a card with the other 

important codes and numbers for the vehicle (such as the VIN number and Radio 

code etc.).

FastCheck 

Corsa D 

The number of miles until the next service can be selected by the user, 9000 miles or 

18000 miles can be selected. The number of days until the next service is always set 

at 364 days (1 year). 

Astra-H / Zafira-B 

The number of miles until the next service and number of days until the next service 

are calculated by the OmiCheck depending on the operators selections of the 

following: 

1. Country - The miles and days until next service are set to values pre-determined 

by GM, depending on the Country the vehicle is being used in. 

The operator must first select the Continent and then the Country. 

For core European Countries (UK, Ireland, France, Belgium, Germany, Spain, 

Italy, Portugal, Holland, Austria etc.) select ‘Other European Countries’. 

2. ECO Service, ECO Service Flex - For most core European countries the 

Operator can set the vehicle to either ‘ECO Service’ (the standard GM service 

plan which used standard GM values for miles and days until next service) or 

‘ECO Service Flex’ (the values for miles and days until next service are 

dynamically set by the vehicle’s onboard computers, which monitor how the 

vehicle is being driven and set the Service Intervals accordingly). 

For ECO Service Flex Petrol vehicles the OmiCheck will program the vehicle with 

the maximum number of miles allowed by the Flex system (22000 miles) and the 

maximum number of days allowed (728, or 2 years). 

For ECO Service Flex Diesel vehicles the OmiCheck will program the vehicle 

with the maximum number of miles allowed by the Flex system (31000 miles) and 

the maximum number of days allowed (728, or 2 years). 

These are default values which ensure that the Service Indicator will come on in 

either 22000 or 31000 miles or 2 years, whichever occurs first, if the ECO Service 

Flex system fails for any reason. 

Vectra-C / Signum 

Only a straight reset is available on these vehicles. The programmed Service Interval 

values of miles and days until the next service cannot be altered. 

NOTE: The Engine Oil used on these vehicles is ‘Long-life Oil’. When the Engine Oil 

is changed the Technician must use the ‘Long-life Oil’ reset option on the OmiCheck 

(see below) to reset the Engine Control Module. The Technician must then select 

‘Service’ again to restart the Service Interval Reset. 

CAUTION: It is important to depress, and release, the brake pedal when prompted by 

the OmiCheck during the Reset procedure. If this is not done correctly the Reset will 

not be successful. 

62

Pre-CAN vehicles 

63 

FastCheck 

This function should be used after a vehicle has been serviced. 

The vehicle is programmed with the number of miles and days (which ever one occurs 

first) until the next service and the Service Indicator light is turned off. 

The reset is started by selecting the 'Service’ option. 

To return to a previous menu, press the key. 

Please ensure that the vehicle is stationary and check that all the vehicle's doors are 

closed. 

Press on the OmiCheck to reset the Service Interval. 

If successful the OmiCheck will display 'Service Reset Passed'. 

Long-Life Oil Reset 

CAN Vehicles - (Vectra-C and Signum) 

NOTE: The engine must NOT be running when performing this procedure. 

This function must be used when an Engine Oil Change has been performed on the 

vehicle. 

The Long-Life Oil Reset is started by selecting the ‘Long-Life Oil’ option. 

The Technician must then select the cable to be used. 

The OmiCheck will check the Engine Control Module to ensure that the function is 

supported for the current engine. This function is not supported and not necessary on 

Astra-H, Corsa-D or Zafira-B. 

The OmiCheck will check the Engine Speed to ensure that the engine is NOT running 

then read the current value of ‘Remaining Oil Life’ from the Engine Control Module 

and display. If the value is less than 15% the Oil MUST be changed and a reset 

performed. 

The OmiCheck will then perform the Reset. The ‘Remaining Oil Life’ parameter will 

be read from the Engine Control Module and displayed again. It will read 100% if the 

reset has been successful.

FastCheck 

Land Rover vehicles 

There are two options available for Land Rover. 

Service Interval Reset 

This option resets the conventional service interval indicator. This function is to be 

used AFTER a full service has been completed on the vehicle. 



fitted. This is not necessary on vehicles with petrol or LPG engines or diesel engines 

if DPF is not fitted. The counter should only be reset AFTER the oil has been 

changed. 

Mercedes Vehicles 

There are two different types of servicing for Mercedes, Assyst Plus and Flexible 

Service System. The service type will automatically be determined from the vehicle. 

Assyst Plus: 

NOTE: Any DTCs (Diagnostic Trouble Codes) present on the Assyst Plus control 

module may lead to incorrect servicing information and services to be preformed 

incorrectly. Different variants of Assyst Plus have different service functions available. 

Assyst Plus Service Functions 

• Reset indicator 

• Additional work 

• Service status 

• Service history 

• Undo reset 

• Undo additional 

• Read DTCs 

• Clear DTCs 

Reset indicator 

This function is used to reset the overall maintenance of the vehicle. The current 

service status information will be displayed. 

To abort the reset, press the key. Confirmation of the service being aborted will be 

displayed, press any key for this point to return to the Assyst Plus menu. To proceed 

with the reset press . 

The oil quality must be selected before the reset can be completed. To abort the reset, 

press the key. Confirmation the reset has aborted will be displayed, press any key 

to return to the Assyst Plus menu. To select the oil quality used for the service from 

64

65 

FastCheck 

the menu use the and keys and press to confirm the selection. 

The result of the reset will be displayed, press any key to return to the Assyst Plus 

menu. 

Additional work 

This function is used to add additional service options to the latest service held within 

the service memory. 

The application will display a menu of all available additional work options applicable 

for the vehicle. 

Press the and keys to scroll through the available list. 

Press the key to select/deselect an item. Multiple items can be selected and any 

items selected are highlighted by . 

Press the key to abort and return to the Assyst Plus menu. Press to add these 

selected options to the last service memory. The result of the reset will be displayed, 

press any key to return to the Assyst Plus menu. 

Service status 

This function displays the current service status information. 

Use the and keys to scroll through the status information. Press the key to 

exit and return to the Assyst Plus menu. 

NOTE: It can take some time for the control unit to update the service status 

information after a change in state (e.g. Resetting the service indicator). 

Service history 

This function allows the operator to review the entries held within the service memory. 

The application will display the number of service entries currently stored within the 

service memory. 

Press the key to return to the Assyst Plus menu. Select the desired entry using the 

and keys and press to confirm the selection. 

Press the key to return to the Assyst Plus menu. Press and keys to scroll 

through the service information stored in memory. 

Undo Reset 

This function cancels the latest service stored in the service history (i.e. the last 

performed service). 

A warning will be displayed before the cancel process is performed. This option is only 

intended for resetting a service that has accidentally been reset. 

Press to return to the Assyst Plus menu. Press to cancel the last service. 

Confirmation of the cancellation will be displayed. Press any key for this point to return 

to the Assyst Plus menu.

FastCheck 

NOTE: Services which have been cancelled remain in the service history. The Entry 

will be marked as irrelevant and with data held within will be reset. The Undo Reset 

is only possible if there is an existing service held within the service memory. 

Undo additional 

This function cancels any additional work applied the latest service stored in the 

service history the last preformed service. 

A warning will be displayed before the undo process is performed. This option is only 

intended for resetting an additional service option that has accidentally been reset. 

A menu of all the additional work available from the vehicle’s last service. 

Press and keys to scroll through the available list. 

Press the key to select/deselect an item. Multiple items can be selected and any 

items selected are highlighted by . 

Press to return to the Assyst Plus menu. Press to remove the selected options 

from the service memory. The result of the undo will be displayed, press any key to 

return to the Assyst Plus menu. 

NOTE: Undo is only possible if there is an existing service held within the service 

memory and the selected service options are applicable to the latest service. 

Flexible Service System: 

Select Service Reset and press to confirm the selection. To return to a previous 

menu, press the key. 

When prompted to, check that all the vehicle's doors are closed, then press any 

button on the OmiCheck to have the oil or service light reset. 

WARNING: Be sure to close all the vehicle's doors before sending the reset 

command. Not doing so can result in permanent damage to the vehicle's 

instrument panel. 

You will receive the message "Mercedes Reset" to confirm the reset process was 

completed successfully. 

MG Rover Vehicles 

Scroll through the list of available vehicle models and press to confirm the 


When prompted to, check that all the vehicle's doors are closed, then press any 

button on the OmiCheck to have the oil or service light reset. 

You will receive the message "MG Rover Reset" to confirm the reset process was 


66

Saab Vehicles 

67 

FastCheck 

Select 'Interval and Oil' and press to confirm the selection. To return to a previous 

menu, press the key. 

You will receive the message "Saab Reset" to confirm the reset process was 


Volvo Vehicles 

Select 'Service' and press to confirm the selection. To return to a previous menu, 

press the key. 

You will receive the message "Volvo Reset" to confirm the reset process was 


VAG (Volkswagen and Audi) vehicle 

Manufacturer Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5 

Adaptation - Refer to Variable Service Reset section 

VAG Service Service Long Life Oil Service Reset N/A 

Reset Reset 

Set Oil Type Diesel 

V6 TDI 

Petrol 

Non Long 

Life Oil 

Non Long 

Life Oil 

View Oil Type N/A 

Service Reset N/A 

Service Inspection 1 N/A 

Inspection 2 N/A 

Use the and keys to select the required menu option and press to confirm the 


You will receive the message "VAG Reset" to confirm the reset process was 

completed successfully.

FastCheck 

Variable Service Reset (VAG) 

For some VAG (Audi and VW) vehicles manufactured since 2000, the variable service 

reset option must be used. Refer to the Vehicle Application List. 

WARNING: Changing the baseline / learn values of any channel could have 

adverse effects on engine performance and running. If you have any doubt 

please consult somebody familiar with the system. 

Service 

Type 

Service Service 

Reset 

Adaptation Channel Counter Contents Value to 

Reset 

2 Reset service counters 

(distance and time) 

00000 

40 Distance travelled since last 

service ÷ 100. 

00000 

41 Time elapsed (in days) since 

last service 

00000 

42 Lower limit for distance to 

next inspection 

----- 

43 Upper limit for distance to 


----- 

44 Upper limit for time to next 

inspection 

----- 

45 Quality of engine oil ----- 

To reset the service interval, use the 

to confirm the selection. 

and keys to select channel 2 and press 

Change the value of the channel to 00000 to reset the both the time and distance 

service counters. Use the 

confirm. 

and keys to change each digit to 0 and press to 

NOTE: Channels 40, 41, 42, 43, 44 and 45 are used when installing a new instrument 

pack.Values from the original instrument pack must be entered into the new 

instrument pack to ensure that vehicle servicing is carried out at the correct intervals. 

68

TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System) 

69 

FastCheck 

The TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System) function can be used to re-program 

tyre valves on vehicles fitted with Schrader TPMS valves, refer to the coverage in the 

table below: 

Manufacturer Vehicle - Type 1 Vehicle - Type 2 

Citroen 

C5 

C8 

C4 

C5 II 

C6 

Peugeot 

607 

807 

307 II 

407 

607 II 

Fiat Ulysse 

Lancia Phedra 

Renault 

Laguna II 

Espace IV 

Vel Statis 

Megane II 

Scenic II 

Citroen, Peugeot, Fiat and Lancia (Type 1) 

For Citroen, Peugeot, Fiat and Lancia, the only option is to program all valves using 

the following procedure: 

1. When requested excite each TPMS valve in turn starting with the front left wheel, 

front right wheel, rear right then rear left wheel. In order to excite the valves, an 

exciter such as the Omitec OmiDetect tool should be used. When excited, the 

valve is forced to transmit its valve code and status to the vehicle’s body control 

module. 

2. When the body control module receives the transmission, it stores the tyre valve 

code for the current wheel which is also indicated by the OmiCheck. 

3. When each valve code has been programmed, the OmiCheck will show a 

confirmation message will appear at which point you can confirm programming 

or abort.

FastCheck 

Citroen, Peugeot, Fiat and Lancia (Type 2) 

With these vehicles all tyres need to be inflated to 3.7 bar for programming to be 

successful. In order to excite the valves to transmit their codes an exciter such as the 

Omitec OmiDetect tool should be used. 

Follow the on screen instructions which indicate the order the wheels are to be 

programmed in. The spare wheel is included along with the other wheels, but if this 

option is not supported by the vehicle, a message will appear after a few seconds to 

indicate this. 

NOTE: Remember to reset the correct tyre pressures when finished. 

Renault 

General 

NOTE: For Renault vehicles which use the ‘Renault Card Keyless Ignition System’ 

and the ‘START’ button (Megane II, Scenic II etc.): 

To switch the ignition on WITHOUT starting the engine: 

1. Unlock the car with the remote (card). 

2. Insert the card into the card reader. 

3. Without pressing the brake or clutch pedal push and hold the ‘START’ button for 

at least 5 seconds. The dash should illuminate and the button should be 

released. 

All diagnostics can now be carried out. 

TPMS is the Tyre Pressure Monitoring System. 

Each valve sensor has a unique code and is matched to a particular wheel. This is 

programmed into the UCH control module. This enables a faulty wheel to be identified 

(given that the receiver can identify which wheel is transmitting). The sensor emits an 

RF (Radio Frequency) signal containing the valve code, status and tyre pressure. If 

wheels are to be swapped around then reprogramming will need to be carried out to 

identify the new position of the wheel. 

Each valve sensor has a coloured ring attached to the valve nut, each colour 

corresponds to a particular wheel position: 

Front Left: Green 

Front Right: Yellow 

Rear Left: Red 

Rear Right: Black 

It is recommended that if tyres are moved around that the coloured rings are replaced 

in the correct wheel position. 

70

71 

FastCheck 

Each valve sensor will emit a signal every hour if stationary, and every 15 minutes if 

a leak is present. If moving it will emit a signal every minute if no leak present, and 

every 10 seconds if a leak is present. 

NOTE: In the live data the tyre pressures will display a default value of 3.5 bar until 

the valves have been forced to transmit. 

Renault (Type 1) 

This feature allows the user to read and clear faults, view live data, test the TPMS 

display lights and reprogram the unit via the Command Menu. 

The Command Menu features are: 

1. Program tyre valves - This allows the user to program 1 valve or 4 valves by 

a. Manually entering the valve code from the keypad. The code is written on a 

label if the sensor is new, or if the sensor is used then remove the tyre and 

read the code on the sensor 

b. Automatically forcing the valve to emit the code by using an exciter (such as 

the Omitec OmiDetect tool), or deflating the tyre pressure by at least 1 bar, 

or rotating the wheel by more than 20 km/h. When deflating the tyre the valve 

will not transmit until 15 minutes has elapsed. 

NOTE: If fault code 0007 is present, automatic coding will not be possible. 

When using the exciter it should be placed resting on the tyre under the 

appropriate valve. When the sensor has been excited and the transmitted 

code has been received the OmiCheck will indicate a successful read. The 

option is then given to program the new code. 

2. Select the winter tyre option - This is used during the winter in some countries 

where the weather conditions require winter tyres. 

3. Select the summer tyre option - This is used as default or during the summer 

when winter tyres are changed. 

4. Set control module with TPMS option - Programs the control module with the 

TPMS option. 

5. Set control module without TPMS option - Disables the TPMS option. 

6. Set tyre pressure limits - Enables the setting of maximum and minimum tyre 

pressure limits. 

7. Change trigger limit. 

8. Drive the actuator - Tests the TPMS display lights.

FastCheck 





An option is given as to select the current tyre set (Summer/Winter). Follow the on 

screen instructions which indicate the order the wheels are to be programmed in. 

After operating the exciter alongside the requested wheel, if successful a message 

will be displayed on the screen indicating that the valve code has been detected and 

displaying the valve code. After all 4 wheel codes have been successfully detected 

then an option is given to program the codes. 


TPMS Trouble shooting 

If a valve appears to not respond when stimulated with an exciter tool, check the 

following: 

• The tyre valve is a TPMS valve. 

• The exciter is not pointing directly at the valve stem. The valve stem is metal and 

will prevent a good RF signal. On low profile tyres, the area for the RF to penetrate 

the tyre sidewall is small, carefully aim the exciter half-way between the tyre rim 

and the tread. 

• Check the batteries are not low in the exciter and the TPMS valve. 

• If there is no response from the valve after the checks have been made then it 

could be that the TPMS valve itself is faulty. 

Manual TPMS Process 

BMW 

Run-flat Reset (RPA – Tyre Deflation Detection) 

The run-flat system monitors the pressure in the four mounted tyres while the vehicle 

is being driven. 

The system will provide an alert whenever the inflation pressure in a tyre drops 

significantly in relation to the pressure of another tyre. 

The following BMW vehicles have the RPA system fitted: 

BMW 3 Series (E90/E91/E92/E93) 

BMW 5 Series (E60/E61) 

BMW 7 Series (E65/E66/E67/E68) 

BMW X3 (E83) 

BMW X5 (E53) 

72

73 

FastCheck 

It is necessary to initiate the RPA reset process IMMEDIATELY after every tyre 

pressure correction, after a tyre or wheel change or after a trailer has been attached 

or detached. The reset MUST be started before driving the vehicle for the first time 

after one of the above events. 

When a reset is required (due to a pressure change in one of the tyres) the vehicle 

will inform the driver by turning on the RPA Warning Lamp, which will glow red, and 

sounding an acoustic signal. 

When the RPA Warning Lamp is on but the colour is yellow this indicates that the RPA 

system has failed or is malfunctioning. In this case the system must be diagnosed 

using a OmiCheck. 

The RPA reset process can be started in two different ways depending on the model. 

For vehicles with an iDrive (BMW 5 Series (E60/E61), BMW 7 Series (E65/E66/ 

E67/E68)): 

• On iDrive open the menu. 

• Select ‘Vehicle Settings’. 

• Select ‘FTM’. 

• Start the Engine but do NOT start driving. 

• Select ‘Set Tyre Pressure’. 

• Select ‘Yes’. 

• Start to drive the vehicle, the message ‘initialising’ should be displayed on the 

iDrive screen. 

• The Reset will terminate during shortly after while the vehicle is being driven. The 

message ‘Status: Active’ should be displayed on the iDrive screen when the Reset 

has terminated correctly. 

• If the vehicle is stopped while the reset is occurring the reset will be interrupted and 

will be resumed when the vehicle is driven again. 

For BMW 3 Series (E90/E91/E92/E93): 

• Start the engine but do NOT start driving. 

• Use the menu control button on the indicator stalk to move up or down until the 

‘RESET’ menu item appears. 

• Press the select button on the end of the indicator stalk to confirm your choice of 

the Run Flat Indicator reset option. 

• Hold the button down for approximately 5 seconds until the ‘RESET?’ symbol is 

shown.

FastCheck 

• Drive off. The Reset will terminate without informing the driver of success. If the 

Reset has not been carried out correctly however the RPA Warning Lamp will glow 

red and the process must be repeated. 



For BMW X3 (E53), BMW X5 (E83): 


• Hold down the button (shown in the diagram below) for approximately 5 seconds, 

or until the RPA Warning Lamp glows yellow. 

OM1345 

• The Warning Lamp should stay yellow for 5 seconds to indicate that the Reset has 

started. 






74

Mini 

75 

FastCheck 

Run-flat Reset (RPA – Tyre Deflation Detection) 

The run-flat system monitors the pressure in the four mounted tyres while the vehicle 

is being driven. 

The system will provide an alert whenever the inflation pressure in a tyre drops 

significantly in relation to the pressure of another tyre. 

It is necessary to initiate the RPA reset process IMMEDIATELY after every tyre 

pressure correction, after a tyre or wheel change or after a trailer has been attached 

or detached. The reset MUST be started before driving the vehicle for the first time 

after one of the above events. 

When a reset is required (due to a pressure change in one of the tyres) the vehicle 

will inform the driver by turning on the RPA Warning Lamp, which will glow red, and 

sounding an acoustic signal. 

When the RPA Warning Lamp is on but the colour is yellow this indicates that the RPA 

system has failed or is malfunctioning. In this case the system must be diagnosed 

using a BMW OmiCheck. 

The RPA reset process is as follows: 


• Press the RPA Reset button (shown in the diagram below) and hold down for at 

least 5 seconds, or until the RPA Warning Lamp on the indicator panel glows 

yellow.

FastCheck 

OM1346 

• The Warning Lamp should stay yellow for 5 seconds to indicate that the Reset has 

started. 






76


General 


The list of manufacturer specific applications loaded onto the OmiCheck depends on 

the applications purchased with your OmiCheck package. 

As with all applications, the and keys are used to select the desired option, and 

the key used to confirm the selection. 

Most manufacturer applications follow the same or similar procedures. Certain 

manufacturer applications require extra information. The following topics cover the 

extra information required to support these applications. 

77


Audi, Seat, Skoda and Volkswagen 

Service Reset 

The Service Reset option allows the technician to access and reset the oil and 

inspection service indicator on instrument packs fitted before May 1999. For vehicles 

manufactured after this date, and for all non-European vehicles, service reset should 

be done using the adaption option. 

By using the Service Reset option the OmiCheck will write the necessary reset value 

to the required channel. The value and channel are based on the make and model of 

the particular VAG vehicle. 

Live Data (VAG Mode 8) 

Live data can be viewed for all systems by selecting the appropriate Data Group for 

the vehicle under test (see data groups codes listed above). To view live data, select 

system from the 'Systems Menu' and follow on-screen instructions. 

Whilst viewing any live data display group another display group may be accessed by 

pressing the or keys. The description for each displayed live data item can be 

viewed by pressing the key. 

Ignition (transponder) Key Re-programming 

This procedure is required if keys are lost, a replacement Engine Management ECM 

is fitted, new or additional ignition (transponder) keys needs to be matched to the 

vehicle. When transponder (ignition) keys are matched to the vehicle the key data is 

stored in the memory of the immobiliser ECU and used to recognise and validate the 

ignition keys. 

The matching of ignition (transponder) keys to a particular vehicle requires the use of 

the following functions: Login ECM and Adaptation. The Login ECM function 

enables the technician to enter the 5 or 7 digit login code. A valid login code must be 

entered in order to program new ignition (transponder) keys for all VAG cars. The 

Adaptation function enables the technician to adapt new and additional ignition 

(transponder) keys. 

The procedure for matching the ignition transponder must be carried out for all of the 

ignition keys, including the existing ones. The number of keys already matched will 

be displayed when the key matching channel is selected via Adaptation. If the 

vehicle is matched with only one key the vehicle can be start immediately with this 

key. If more than one key has been matched to the vehicle only the last key can be 

used to start the vehicle immediately. The key matching process will terminate if an 

already matched ignition key is used to switch the ignition on again and the ignition 

remained switch on for longer than a 1 second. It will also terminate, if the permissible 

key matching period of 30 seconds is exceeded. In both cases the ECM will store 

Diagnostic trouble codes (DTC). 

78

Re-programming transponder keys 


Preliminary Requirements 

• Ensure that all keys to be matched to the vehicle are available. 

• ECM supports Login ECM and the correct Login Code is available. 

• OmiCheck diagnostic tester. 

Adding transponder keys to vehicle with separate Immobiliser ECM 

1. Connect the OmiCheck to the vehicle’s data link connector. 

2. Switch ignition on with the first key to be matched to the immobiliser ECM. 

3. From ‘System Menu’ select the Immobiliser ECM. 

4. From ‘Function Menu’ select ‘Login ECM’. 

5. Follow on-screen instructions and enter login code, including any leading zeroes. 

6. On acceptance of the code ‘Code accepted will be displayed, otherwise an 

appropriate error message will be displayed. 

7. From the ‘Function Menu’ select ‘Adaptation’. 

8. Enter channel number 1, the value displayed for the entered channel is the 

number of keys currently matched. 

9. Follow on-screen instructions to enter the total number of keys to be matched. 

10. Switch ignition off and remove key. 

11. Insert in the ignition the next key to be matched and switch the ignition on, the 

anti-theft immobiliser sensor light with switch on for approximately 2 seconds and 

then go out. This indicates that the key in the ignition is now matched to the 

vehicle immobiliser. 

12. Before the 30 seconds matching time ends and the anti-theft immobiliser sensor 

light goes out, repeat steps 10 and11 for each remaining key until all keys have 

been matched. 

13. When the last ignition key in the sequence is matched with VDO instrument 

cluster the anti-theft immobiliser sensor light goes out after matching the last 

ignition key. With Motometer instrument cluster the anti-theft immobiliser sensor 

light flashes briefly after the last key is matched. 

14. Repeat step 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7. 

15. Enter channel number 0. 

16. Follow on-screen instructions to erase learned values. This will enable the 

re-learning procedure of the immobiliser ECM. 

Note: Possible vehicles with separate Immobiliser are: Audi models up to 1997, 

mark 3 Golfs, Passat B4, Transporter, Lupo and Sharan vans. 

79


Adding transponder keys to vehicle with Immobiliser in the instrument 

cluster 


2. Switch ignition on with the key you want to match. 

3. From ‘System Menu’ select the Instrument ECM. 

4. From ‘Function Menu’ select ‘Login ECM’. 


6. On acceptance of the code ‘Code accepted will be displayed, otherwise 


7. From the ‘Function Menu’ select ‘Adaptation’. 

8. Enter channel number 21, the value displayed for the entered channel is the 

number of keys currently matched. 

9. Follow on-screen instructions to enter the total number of keys to be matched. 

10. Switch ignition off and remove key. 

11. Insert in the ignition the next key to be matched and switch the ignition on, the 

anti-theft immobiliser sensor light with switch on for approximately 2 seconds and 

then go out. This indicates that the key in the ignition is now matched to the 

vehicle immobiliser. 

12. Before the 30 seconds matching time ends and the anti-theft immobiliser sensor 

light goes out, repeat steps 10 and 11 for each remaining key until all keys have 

been matched. 

13. When the last ignition key in the sequence is matched with VDO instrument 

cluster the anti-theft immobiliser sensor light goes out after matching the last 

ignition key. With Motometer instrument cluster the anti-theft immobiliser sensor 

light flashes briefly after the last key is matched. 

14. Repeat step 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7. 

15. Enter channel number 0. 

16. Follow on-screen instructions to erase learned values. This will enable the 

re-learning procedure of the immobiliser ECM. 

Note: Possible vehicles with Immobiliser in the instrument cluster: Audi models 

from 1997, mark 4, 5 Golfs, Passat B5 and B6. 

80


Tips on the use of Basic Settings and Adaptation function 

On replacement of a vehicle sensor, basic settings can be used to enable the ECU to 

re-learn quickly the operating conditions of the new sensor as opposed to learning the 

operating conditions over time. This is done by selection of display group 0 or the 

display group in which the sensor measured value would appear. 

On replacement of a vehicle ECM with an existing (used) ECM, the adaptation 

function can be used to erase all previously learned values retuning the ECU to the 

factory default settings; this gives the ECM the chance of re-learning the operating 

conditions of the attached sensors. This is done by selection of adaptation channel 0 

and then following the onscreen instructions. 

81


Engine Codes 

Engine Code: ADX, AEA, ABD, ABU and AEV 

Display Description 

Group 

1 1. Engine speed. 

2. Coolant temperature. 

3. Lambda value. 

4. Operating condition (see Table 1 for the relevance of these figures). 


2. Injection period. 

3. Battery voltage. 

4. Intake air temperature. 


2. Engine load signal. 

3. Throttle valve angle. Calculated figure, dependent on throttle valve 

potentiometer. 

4. Ignition timing value. Calculated figure, dependent on the ignition timing 

adjustment (this value must not be used to check or adjust ignition 

timing). 



3. Road speed (for engine code ABD > 9.94, the speed will not be shown). 



2. Duty cycle (of activated charcoal filter solenoid valve 1). 

3. Lambda correction factor. 

4. Mixture correction factor. 






2. Lambda probe voltage. 


4. Operating condition (see Table 1 for the relevance of the figures). 


2. Load. 

3. Knock control number 1 cylinder (ignition retardation). 

4. Knock control number 2 cylinder (ignition retardation). 


2. Load. 

3. Knock control number 3 cylinder. 

4. Knock control number 4 cylinder. 

82


2. Load. 

3. Integral knock number 1 cylinder. 



2. Load. 




83


Table 1 - Operating Conditions (AEA only) 

Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 8-digit block 

X X X X X X X X Display Group Display Group Display Group 7 

1 

4 

1 No. 1 cylinder 

recognised 

- - 

1 Idling switch - Activated 

closed 

charcoal filter 

system solenoid 

valve 1 active 

1 AT recognised - Lambda control 

active 

1 A/C 

Acceleration Acceleration or 

compressor or full load full load 

switched on 

(`1' must not 

be displayed) 

enrichment enrichment 

1 A/C switched 

on ('1' must 

not be 

displayed) 

1 Speed boost 

gear engaged 

1 Torque 

reduction 

(display must 

always show 

'1') 

1 Gear engaged 

(if '1' is 

displayed) 

Engine Code: AAM, ABS and ADZ 


Group 









84 

Full load 

recognised 

Part load 

recognised 

Idling switch 

closed 

Overrun 

cut-off active 

Full load 

recognised 

Part load 

recognised 

Idling switch 

closed 

Overrun cut-off 

active




3. Throttle valve angle. Calculated figure, dependent on throttle valve 

potentiometer. 

4. Ignition timing value. Calculated figure, dependent on the ignition timing 

adjustment (this value must not be used to check or adjust ignition 

timing). 



3. Road speed (0 to 7, with 4 as a centred value). 






85


Table 2 - Operating Conditions 


X X X X X X X X Display Group 1 Display Group 4 

1 - - 

1 Idling switch closed - 

1 - - 

1 A/C compressor Acceleration or full load 

switched on 

enrichment 

1 A/C switched on Full load recognised 

1 - Part load recognised 

1 Torque reduction 

(display must always 

show '1') 

Idling switch closed 

1 Driving stage engaged Overrun cut-off active 

Engine Code: AEK 


Group 



3. Lambda value. 

4. Ignition timing. 




4. Not relevant. 



3. Throttle valve angle. 

4. Intake manifold temperature. 



3. Road speed signal. 



2. Learned idling stabilisation value. 

3. Idling stabilisation valve duty cycle. 

4. Adjustment requirements (see Table 3 for the relevance of these 

figures). 

86


6 1. Lambda factor. 

2. Learned idling adaption value (specification range not currently 

available). 

3. Learned part load adaption value (specification range not currently 

available). 

4. Learned full load adaption value (specification range not currently 

available). 

87


Table 3 - Engine Code AEK 


X X X X X Display Group 4 Display Group 5 

1 Overrun Not relevant 

1 Idling Signal from AT 

1 Part load N/A 

1 Full load A/C stand-by 

1 Acceleration A/C compressor 

switched on 

Engine Code: ABF (Digifant 3.0) 


Group 

1 1. Coolant temperature. 

2. Engine speed. 


4. Injection period 



3. Throttle valve angle. Calculated figure, (dependent on throttle valve 

potentiometer). 








3. Ignition timing. Calculated figure (this value must not be used to check 

or adjust ignition timing). 

4. Engine load. 






Engine Code: ABF (Digifant 3.2) 


Group 

1 1. Engine speed 



4. Adjustment conditions (see Table 4 for the relevance of these figures). 

88

















3. N/A 


6 1. Lambda integration value (see note below). 

2. Lambda integration value (see note below). 

3. Learning value for idling stabilisation. 


NOTE: Always observe the values in lines 1 and 2 of this display group together. 

If a 0 is displayed in line 1, line 2 must show a value between 0 and 70. 

If 225 is displayed in line 1, line 2 must show a value between 144 and 255. 

89


Table 4 - Operating Conditions 

X X X X X X X X Display groups 1, 4 & 5 line 4 

1 Fault stored in memory 

1 Not assigned 

1 A/C compressor switched on 

1 Idling switch open 

1 Fault in lambda control 

1 Throttle valve closed 

1 Engine speed above 2500 rpm 

1 Coolant temperature below 80°C 

Engine Code: 2E 


Group 




4. Injection time. 



3. Throttle angle. 




3. Air intake temperature. 




3. Calculated ignition point. 




3. Throttle angle. 


Engine Code: 1Z 


Group 


2. Quantity injected. 

3. Voltage supplied (specified). 

4. Coolant temperature 

90



2. Accelerator pedal position 

3. Operating condition (see Table 5 for the relevance of the figures in line 

3). 



2. Mass of air drawn in (specified). 

3. Mass of air drawn in (Actual. The measurement requires that the EGR 

system be switched off after a period of approximately 10 minutes at idle 

speed, requiring a burst of throttle or an engine restart to switch it back 

on). 

4. EGR valve duty cycle (specified). 


2. Commencement of injection (specified). 

3. Commencement of injection (actual). 

4. Duty cycle commencement of injection valve. 


2. Start quantity 

3. Commencement of injection (specified). 


6 1. Vehicle speed. 

2. Brake pedal monitor (see Table 5 for the relevance of the figures in line 

2). 

3. Cruise control system (see separate cruise control table F for the 

relevance of the figures in line 3). 

4. Cruise control system (vehicles fitted with cruise control system display 

0, vehicles without cruise control system display 255). 

7 1. Fuel temperature. 

2. No display. 




2. Quantity injected (driver's requirement - pedal position 

3. Injection quantity limitation value (from torque map). 

4. Injection quantity limitation value (from opacity map). 


2. Quantity injected (cruise control system active). 

3. Injection quantity limitation (Cruise control active). 

4. Voltage supplied (from opacity map). 

10 1. Mass of air drawn in (actual). 

2. Atmospheric pressure (ambient) 

3. Intake manifold pressure (charge pressure). 

4. Accelerator pedal position. 

91



2. Charge pressure (specified). 

3. Charge pressure (actual). 

4. Duty cycle from charge pressure limitation valve. 

12 1. Not relevant. 

2. Glow period. 

3. Voltage supply from control unit. 


13 1. Quantity injected (deviation - No. 4 cylinder to No. 3 cylinder). 

2. Quantity injected (deviation - No. 2 cylinder to No. 3 cylinder). 

3. Quantity injected (deviation - No. 1 cylinder to No. 3 cylinder). 

4. No display. 

92


Table 5 

Relevance when '1' is displayed in the three digit block 

X X X Display Group 2 - Line 3 Display Group 6 - Line 2 

1 Idling speed boost when air Clutch pedal switch open 

conditioning system is 

switched on 

(brake pedal open) 

1 Idling speed switch closed Brake pedal switch open 

(accelerator pedal position 

below 17%) 

(brake pedal operated) 

1 Conditioner compressor on Brake pedal switch open 

(brake pedal operated) 

Table 6 

Relevance when '1' is displayed in the 5 digit block 

X X X X X Display Group 6 - LIne 3 

1 Clutch pedal switch open (clutch pedal 

operated) 

1 Brake light switch closed (brake pedal 

operated) 

1 Speed accepted 


1 Cruise control system on 

Engine Code: ABV 


Group 


2. Engine temperature. 

3. Lambda factor. 

4. Ignition angle. 



3. System voltage. 

4. EGR temperature (if acceptable). 







3. Road speed. 

4. Operating status (see Table 7 for the relevance of the figures in line 4). 

93



2. Idling speed stabilisation valve. 

3. Duty cycle. 

4. Operating status (see Table 7 for the relevance of the figures in line 4). 

6 1. Lambda factor. 

2. Lambda adaption (Idle). 

3. Lambda adaption (part load). 

4. Lambda adaption (full throttle). 

94

Table 7 



X X X X X Operating status 

Display group 4 (5 

block numeric 

group - Operating 

status may also be 

shown, for 

example 

acceleration from 

part load, as 

10100). 

1 Acceleration 

enrichment 

Engine Code: ADY and AGG 


Group 




4. Adjustment condition (see Table 8 for the relevance of the figures in line 

4). 








4. Duty cycle (off throttle valve positioner). 

95 

Operating status. 

Display group 5 (4 

block numeric 

group - Operating 

status may be also 

shown, for 

example Air con. 

compressor and 

air con. on, as 11 

Display Group 1). 

Not relevant 

1 Full throttle Air conditioning 

compressor on 

1 Part load Air conditioning on 

1 Idling speed Gearbox 

intervention (auto 

gearbox) 

1 Overrun cut-off Driving position 

(auto gearbox 

only) 

Operating statuses 

not OK, interrogate 

fault memory again 

Not relevant





4. Engine operating condition (see Table 8 for the relevance of the figures 

in line 4). 


2. Duty cycle (for activated charcoal filter). 

3. Consumption signal. 

4. Operating condition (of Lambda control (see Table 9 for the relevance of 

the figures in line 4). 

6 1. Additive learning value (for Lambda control at idling). 

2. Multiplicative learning value (for Lambda control at part/full load range). 

3. Multiplicative learning value (for throttle valve positioner duty cycle). 

4. Multiplicative learning value (for throttle valve positioner duty cycle with 

auto gearbox). 

7 1. Co-ordination (of Hall sender to engine speed sensor). 

2. Co-ordination (of Hall sender to engine speed sensor). 

3. Altitude correction value 

4. Operating condition (of throttle valve positioner. Refer to Table 8 for the 


96

Table 8 

Table 9 



X X X X X X X X Adjustment Conditions 

Display Group 1 

Engine Code: ABK 


Group 

1 1. Engine speed (idling). 


3. Lambda probe voltage (fluctuates). 

4. Setting condition (see Table 10 for the relevance of the figures in line 4). 

97 

Engine Operating 

Conditions Display 

Group 4 

1 Not relevant Overrun 

1 Signal from automatic 

gearbox 

Idling 

1 Air conditioner 

compressor switched 

on 

Part load 

1 Idling switch on Full load 

1 Fault in the Lambda 

control 

Not relevant 

1 Throttle valve open Not relevant 

1 Engine running Not relevant 

1 Coolant temperature 

below 80°C 

Not relevant 

Relevance when 1 is displayed in the 8 digit block 

X X X X X X X Lambda Control 

Operating condition - 


Throttle Valve Control 

Operating Condition - 


1 Coding for synchro Mechanical emergency 

running 

1 Not relevant Not relevant 

1 Not relevant Adaption necessary 

1 Lambda control at limit Adaption necessary 

1 Diagnostic fault Not relevant 

1 Lambda probe 

operationally ready 

1 Rich mixture (0= lean 

mixture) 

Adaption terminated 

(battery voltage too low) 

Idle switch open



2. Injection time (computed value between 1.5 and 3.5 ms at idle speed). 

3. Digifant control unit voltage supply. 

4. Intake air temperature 


2. Engine loading (idling). 

3. Throttle valve angle (0 to 2.0% full load greater than 75%). 

4. Duty cycle (off idling speed stabilisation valve (idling)). 



3. Road speed signal (stationary = 255, driving = 0). 

4. Engine load operating state (see Table 11 for the relevance of the 

figures in line 4). 


2. Duty cycle - Of activated charcoal filter solenoid valve -N80 (Valve fully 

open = 100% valve closed =0%). This is closed when engine is idling 

and so long as Lambda control is not active. 

3. Consumption signal - On board computer calculation. The signal can 

checked by observing it with the engine idling, then 'blipping' the throttle 

to raise the engine speed and releasing immediately to bring the 

overrun fuel cut-off function in. At idle the reading should indicate 1, 

should then increase, drop to 0 then return to 1 again. 

4. Operating condition (of Lambda control (see Table 9 for the relevance of 

the figures in line 4) 

98


Table 10 - Setting Conditions Table 

Relevance when '1' is displayed in the 8 digit block. These setting conditions are met 

only when 8 zeros are indicated. 

X X X X X X X X Display Group 1 - Line 4 

1 Not relevant 

1 Ignition angle retardation during gearshift active 

(auto only) 

1 AC compressor not switched off (switched 

automatically) 

1 Idling switch not closed 

1 Lambda control switched off 

1 Throttle valve open 

1 Engine speed within valid range 

1 Engine temperature less than 80°C 

Table 11 - Engine Load Operating State Table 

Relevance when '1' is displayed in the 8 digit block. Read-out = 0, operating state not 

achieved. Read-out = 1, operating state achieved 

X X X X X X X Display Group 4 - line 4 

1 Overrun fuel cut-off (10000000) 

1 Idling (01000000) 

1 Part load (0010000) 

1 Full Load (00010000) 




Engine Code: AAE 


Group 



3. Lambda control value. 

4. Operating state (see Table 12 for the relevance of the figures in line 4). 


2. Injection time (computed value between 1.5 and 3.5 ms at idle speed). 

3. Battery voltage 

4. Intake air temperature 

99




3. Throttle valve angle (idling 0 to 2.0%, full load greater than 75%). 

4. ignition angle. 



3. Road speed signal (Stationary = 255, driving = 0). 

4. Operating state (see Table 12 for the relevance of the figures in line 4). 


2. Duty cycle - Operating states may be combined on the display, 

dependent on the status of the vehicle equipment active at that 

particular time. 

3. Lambda control valve. 


100


Table 12 - Setting Conditions Table 

Relevance when '1' or '0' is displayed in the 8 digit block 

X X X X X X X X Operating State - Operating state Display 

Display Group 1 4 

1 Idling contact closed - 

1 AC compressor on Acceleration 

enrichment/lean 

mixture on deceleration 

1 Air conditioner on Full load 


(gearshift intervention 

in auto gearbox) 

- 

1 - Idling contact closed 

1 Driving stage 

(automatic gearbox) 

Overrun cut-off 

Engine Code: ABC 


Group 


2. Intake manifold pressure (100% = 1022 hPa, 32% = 327 hPa). 

3. Not relevant 

4. Idling stabilisation position (18 to 75 steps at idle). 

2 1. Throttle valve angle. 




3 1. Lambda learning factor (cylinders 1 to 3, 0.84 to 1.12). 


3. Lambda control factor (cylinders 1 to 3, 0.84 to 1.2). 




3. Lambda control factor (cylinders 1 to 3). 



2. Knock control depth (base read-out = 60°). 



6 1. Idling stabilisation position. 

2. Idling stabilisation learning value. 

3. Idling stabilisation disturbance influence. 


101




3. Lambda learning factor (cylinders 1 to 3). 







2. Idling switch position (0 = open, 1 = closed). 




2. Idling switch position (0= open, 1 = closed). 



102


Engine Code: AAH (and ABC for A4 models '95 on) 


Group 

1 1. Coolant temperature (85 to 105°C up to 05/94, 85 to 110°C 06/94 on). 

2. Air mass meter output voltage (1.45 to 1.58V, or 1.47 to 1.62V, 

dependent on valve-gear type). 

3. Altitude read-out (0 to 0.025V up to 05/94, or 0 to 255). 

4. Voltage supply to ECU (battery voltage) - 12.0 to 14.0V. 

2 1. Throttle valve potentiometer voltage (voltage 0.25 to 4.75V - idle speed 

through to full load). 

2. Throttle valve potentiometer voltage (voltage 0.25 to 1.275V - idle speed 

at lower part of load range). 

3. Throttle valve potentiometer voltage (programmed value (0.25 to 

0.50V). 

4. Mechanical idle switch. (0 = open, 1 = closed). 

3 1. Engine speed - Idle speed 700 to 800 rpm up to 05/94 then 650 to 750 

or 700 to 800 rpm from 06/94 on dependent upon valve-gear type fitted. 

2. Engine load - 15 to 32% up to 05/94, then 15 to 32% or 15 to 35% from 

06/94 on dependent upon valve-gear type fitted 

3. Throttle valve angle - With ignition on only 0% (idle) or greater than 95% 

(full load). 

4. Vehicle speed. 

4 1. Idling speed controller - At idle. Range between -2 and 2. 

2. Idling speed stabilisation value - Automatic gearbox with 'N' or 'P' 

selected, manual gearbox in neutral. Manual = -16 to 14, auto = -20 to 

10 

3. Idling speed stabilisation value - Automatic gearbox in 'D', 1, 2, 3, or 'R', 

Manual always = 0, auto. = -20 to 10. 

4. Gearbox input when engine idling 0 = off, and 1 = on. Refer to Table 13. 

5 1. Lambda programmed value - -25 to 25% at idling speed (bank 1). 

2. Lambda programmed value - -19 to 19% (vehicles to 05/94), -25 to 25% 

(vehicles 06/94 on), at part load 1 (bank 1). 





6 1. Lambda programmed value - -25 to 25% at idling speed (bank 2). 


(vehicles 06/94 on), at part load 1(bank 2). 





103


7 1. Lambda control (bank 1) - -6.0 to 6.0%. 

2. Lambda programme range display (see Table 14 for the relevance of 


3. Lambda programme demand diagnosis (see Table 15 for the relevance 

of the figures in line 3). 

4. Lambda programme demand display (see Table 15 for the relevance of 

the figures in line 4). Not relevant. 

8 1. Lambda control (bank 2) - -6.0 to 6.0%. 

2. Lambda programme range display (see Table 14 for the relevance of 


3. Lambda programme demand diagnosis (see Table 15 for the relevance 

of the figures in line 3). 

4. Lambda programme demand display (see Table 15 for the relevance of 

the figures in line 4). Not relevant. 

9 1. Lambda control (bank 1). 

2. Lambda control (bank 2). 

3. Charcoal filter valve duty cycle. 

4. Throttle valve angle (at idling speed = 0, at full load = greater than 95%). 

10 1. Assigned Lambda value (the difference between this reading and the 

field 2 below must always be < 8%). 

2. Assigned Lambda value (the difference between this reading and the 

field 1 above must always be < 8%). 

3. Lambda probe 1 voltage (bank 1) - Reading must fluctuate, occasionally 

going beyond 0.3 to 0.6V range. 

4. Lambda probe 1 voltage (bank 2) - Reading must fluctuate, occasionally 

going beyond 0.3 to 0.6V range. 

11 1. Ignition timing - without knock control and without digital idling speed 

stabilisation. - (with idling switch open - engine speed raised). 

2. Ignition timing - with knock control and with digital idling speed 

stabilisation. - (average of all four cylinders). 

3. Ignition timing intervention (for digital idling speed stabilisation). 

4. Idling switch function (0 = open, 1 = closed). 

12 1. Momentary engine speed. 


3. Ignition timing map switch-over - selected by the knock control function 

under a variety of conditions including poor fuel quality or abnormal 

engine noises (loose ancillaries or other engine damage). 

4. Ignition timing retardation of knock control - active from a engine load of 

greater than 40% - average of all cylinders. 

13 1. Ignition timing map switch-over - selected by the knock control function 



2. Ignition timing retard of knock control (cylinder 1). 



104


14 1. Ignition timing map switch-over - selected by the knock control function 






15 1. Engine speed (momentary). 

2. Knock sensor signal for cylinder 1. 



16 1. Engine speed (momentary). 




17 1. Timer 1 (see note below). 

2. Timer 2 (see note below). 

3. For vehicles up to 05/94 the display indicates EGR valve duty cycle 

between 0 and 100%. For vehicles 06/94 on the display indicates 

momentary engine load (33 to 60% for ECU suffix 'C', and 30 to 60% for 

ECU suffix 'E'). 

4. EGR temperature. Diagnosis recognised as OK only if EGR 

temperature is in excess of 65°C at the end of the diagnosis. 

NOTE: Timer 1 end value = 2 for ECU with suffix 'C', end value = 1 for ECU with suffix 

'E'. 

Timer 2 end value = 0 for ECU with suffix 'C', end value = 160 for ECU with suffix 'E'. 

If diagnostic conditions are met, the timers are incremented (count up); if these 

conditions are not met, the timers are decremented (count down). The timer functions 

operate in a different manner for the differing ECU suffix letter types, and are explained 

individually below. 

Suffix 'C' ECU 

For Suffix 'C' ECUs, Timer 1 is incremented by 1 as soon as Timer 2 has reached the 

value of 255. If the value of 255 is reached, Timer 2 jumps to 0 and begins counting up 

again to 255. Once the value 255 is reached, Timer 2 jumps to its end value 0 and 

Timer 1 to its end value of 2. 

Suffix 'E' ECU 

Timer 1 is incremented by 1 as soon as Timer 2 has reached the value 255. If the value 

255 is reached, Timer 2 jumps to 0 and begins to count up to 160. 

18 1. Idle speed stabilisation valve on/off ratio. 

2. Idle speed stabilisation valve (current consumption of). 

3. Idle speed stabilisation valve (current control of). 

4. Voltage supply to ECU. 

105


19 1. Engine output (computed value) - momentary. 

2. Inducted air mass. 

3. Road speed - momentary. 

4. Injection time (average of all cylinders). 

20 1. Display group 20 not currently assigned. 

21 1. Display group 21 not currently assigned. 

22 1. Torque reduction stages (see note below). 

2. Ignition timing retardation - because of ASR (only if engine cold - 

coolant temp. less than 20°C). 

3. Reduced engine torque. 

4. Non-reduced engine torque. 

NOTE: Traction control (ASR) information, computed from data supplied on wheel slip 

through the ABS ECU. As required of the system, the engine torque is reduced via the 

engine management ECU; this is achieved in differing manners according to the 

temperature of the engine and the degree of torque reduction required - with engine 

cold (coolant temperature less than 20°C) small reduction (stages 1 to 5) by ignition 

timing retardation, large reduction (stages 6 to 12) by briefly switching off individual 

injectors; with a warm engine (coolant temperature in excess of 40°C), all reductions 

are achieved by briefly switching off individual injectors. 

23 1. Gearbox signal shift signal (see Note 1 below). 

2. Gear recognition signal and gearshift signal (see Note 2 below). 

3. Aircon compressor and HRW signal - 1st digit indicates the Aircon 

compressor, 2nd digit indicates the heated rear window, 0 = off, 1 = on. 

4. Aircon compressor cut-out - 0 = compressor has not been switched off 

by the engine ECU, 1 = compressor has been switched off by the 

engine ECU. 

NOTE 1: '01V' automatic gearboxes only - all others will always show 0. Upshift or 

downshift signal. With vehicle stationary, selector lever in position R = 0,selector lever 

in positions 2, 3, 4, D, P, or N = 1. With vehicle moving above 14 km/h, read-out of 0 

indicates ignition retardation selected for downshift whilst a read-out of 1 indicates 

ignition retardation selected for upshift. 

NOTE 2: First digit indicates gear recognition signal: a read-out of 0 = selector lever in 

R, D, 4, 3 or 2, whilst a read-out of 1 = P or N selected. Second digit indicates ignition 

timing retardation status: a read-out of 0 = ignition timing retardation not active, whilst a 

read-out of 1 = ignition timing retardation active (these signals are very brief). '00' will 

always be shown for vehicles without the '01V' automatic gearbox. 




4. OFF or ON Lambda control. 

106


Table 13 - Gearshift Inputs 

Display Group 4 - Gearshift Input State - Line 4 

X X X X X 4 - Digit Code (ECM 5 - Digit Code (ECM 

Suffix C) 

Suffix E) 

0 Always = 0 Always = 0 

0 Aircon compressor (0 = Aircon compressor (0 = 

off, 1 = on). 

off, 1 = on). 

1 Mechanical Idling switch Mechanical Idling switch 

(1 = closed, 0 = open). (1 = closed, 0 = open). 

1 Always = 1 (except for Always = 1 (except for 

auto gearbox with gear auto gearbox with gear 

engaged which = 0). engaged which = 0). 

0 - Auto gearbox engine 

intervention (0 = not 

active, 1 = active). 

Table 14 - Lambda Programming Range 

X X X X Display Groups 7 & 8 - Line 2 

0 Part load 3 

0 Part load 2 

0 Part load 1 

1 Idling speed 

NOTE: Read-out 0 = engine speed or speed and load for this particular learning range 

not yet reached. 

Read-out 1 = engine speed or speed and load for this particular learning range has 

been reached. 

For Idling speed state, engine is to idle between 650 and 900 rpm. 

For part-load programming ranges, a second person will be needed to perform a road 

test whilst the operator observes the display. During the road test, raise the engine 

speed to between 1500 and 3000 rpm and produce a load by slightly depressing the 

brake. 

107


Table 15 - Lambda programming demand display (and diagnosis on 

vehicles 06/94 on) 

Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 8 digit block 

X X X X X X X X Display Groups 7 & 8 

0 Part load 3 (cylinders 4 to 6) 





1 Part load 1(cylinders 1 to 3) 

1 Idling speed (cylinders 4 to 6) 

0 Idling speed (cylinders 1 to 3) 

NOTE: Read-out 0 = request for renewed learning. 

Read-out 1 = learning process ended for the time being. 

NOTE: On models 06/94 onwards, the Display Groups 7 and 8 may be structured 

differently to that for earlier models. Models up to 05/94 may indicate a Lambda 

learning value in line 2, followed by the range display (Table 14) as line 3 and the 

demand display as line 4: models from 06/94 have the programming range display 

(Table 14) as line 2, a programming demand diagnosis as line 3 followed by demand 

display as line 4. 

Demand diagnosis illustrates which programmed value was checked. If diagnosis has 

been performed the corresponding read-out is set to 1 regardless of whether or not 

the diagnosis was recognised as being OK or not, e.g. if a value of the Lambda 

programming diagnosis in display line 3 is set to 1, but the corresponding value of the 

Lambda programming demand display in display line 4 is not set to 1, this indicates 

that diagnosis was performed but was not recognised as being satisfactory. 

The Lambda programming diagnosis will reset to 0 each time the engine is started at 

a coolant temperature of less than 40°C. 

Demand display illustrates which portion of the engine's operating range the 

programming demand is required in. The format for demand diagnosis and demand 

display is the same. 

108


Engine Code: AAT and ABP 


Group 

1 1. Engine speed - 750 to 800 rpm for manual gearbox equipped vehicles, 

and 690 to 750 rpm for automatic gearbox equipped vehicles. 

2. Fuel quantity injected. 

3. Piston movement sensor voltage. 




2. Accelerator pedal position (0% at idle). 

3. Operating state (Refer to Table 16 for the relevant figures in line 3). 




2. Quality of air inducted (specified). 

3. Quantity of air inducted (actual). 

4. ERG valve duty cycle. 



2. Start of injection (specified). 

3. Start of injection period (actual). 

4. Duty cycle of start of injection valve - N108 


2. Starting quantity injected (stored from last start). 

3. Start of injection. 


6 1. Road speed. 

2. Brake pedal status monitoring (refer to Table 17 for the relevance of the 


3. Cruise control system status switch (refer to Table 18 for the relevance of 


4. Cruise control operating state. 

7 1. Fuel temperature. 




8 1. Engine speed (full throttle test in 3rd or 4th gear, engine coolant temp 

min. 80°C). 

2. Desired fuel quantity injected (full throttle test in 3rd or 4th gear, engine 

coolant temp min. 80°C, must indicate quantity limitation above 42mg/h). 

3. Fuel quantity limitation (speed) - See Note 1 below. 

4. Fuel quantity limitation (induced air) - See Note 2 below. 

109


NOTE 1: Limitation of engine output - read-out to indicate between 37 and 42mg/h for a 

full throttle test in 3rd or 4th gear with an engine coolant min. temp of 80°C. This is 

limitation based upon engine speed. 

NOTE 2: Limitation of engine output - read-out to indicate between 35 and 45mg/h for a 

full throttle test in 3rd or 4th gear with an engine coolant min. temp of 80°C. This is 

limitation based upon measured inducted air quantity. 


2. Fuel quantity injected (with cruise control system active). 

3. Fuel quantity limitation (with automatic gearbox, during gearshift). 

4. Emergency fuel quantity injected (based on voltage signal from 

modulating piston movement sender). 

10 1. Quantity of air inducted. 

2. Atmospheric (ambient) pressure. 

3. Intake manifold (boost) pressure. 


11 1. Quantity of air inducted. 

2. Atmospheric (ambient) pressure. 

3. Intake manifold (boost) pressure. 



2. Glow period (in seconds). 

3. ECU supply voltage. 


13 1. Quantity injected - fuel variance (between cylinder 5 and cylinder 4, for 

idle speed control). 

2. Quantity injected - fuel variance (between cylinder 3 and cylinder 4, for 






14 1. Display Group 14 not been assigned. 


2. Quantity injected (actual). 

3. Fuel consumption. 

4. Desired quantity injected (controlled by driver depressing throttle). 

110


Table 16- Operating State 

Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 3 - digit block 

X X X Display Group 2 

1 Air conditioner demands higher capacity - 

switch off air conditioner. 

1 Idling speed switch closed. 

1 Air conditioner compressor switched on. 

Table 17 - Brake Pedal Status Monitoring 


X X X Display Group 6 

1 Clutch pedal switch (F36) - open 

1 Brake pedal switch (F47) - open 

1 Brake light switch - closed 

Table 18 - Cruise Control System (CCS) Switch Status 


X X X X X X Display Group 6 - line 3 

1 Clutch pedal switch (F36) - 

open 

1 Brake light switch - closed 

1 Speed resumption/ 

acceleration 

1 Speed reduction 

1 CSS off, with speed stored 

1 CSS switched on 

Engine Codes: ADP, ADR and AEB 


Group 

1 1. Engine speed (read-out in steps). 

2. Engine load - injection time per revolution - 1.6 to 2.4 ms (ADP 

engine code), 1.0 to 2.5 ms (ADR engine code), 0.5 to 1.5 ms (AEB 

engine code). 



111


2 1. Engine speed (read-out in steps of 40rpm). 

2. Engine load - Injection time per revolution - 1.6 to 2.4 ms (ADP 

engine code), 1.0 to 2.5 ms (ADR engine code), 0.5 to 1.5 ms (AEB 

engine code). 

3. Injection time - 2.0 to 3.5 ms (ADP engine code), 2.0 to 5.0 ms 

(ADR engine code), 1.5 to 3.0 ms (AEB engine code). 

4. Air mass - 2.5 to 4.5 g/s (ADP engine code), 2.0 to 4.0 g/s (ADR 

engine code), 1.8 to 4.0 g/s (AEB engine code). 

3 1. Engine speed (read-out in steps of 40rpm). 





2. Idle air mass learned (without drive position of automatic gearbox 

selected. 0 is indicated for manual gear box equipped vehicles). 

3. Idle air mass learned (with drive position of automatic gearbox 

selected. 0 is indicated for manual gearbox equipped vehicles). 

4. Idling speed operating state (Refer to Table 19 for the relevance of 

the information in line 4). 

5 1. Road speed (read-out in steps of 10 rpm. Actual measured value). 

2. Road speed (specified). 

3. Idling speed controller. 

4. Air mass - 2.5 to 4.5 g/s (ADP engine code), 2.0 to 4.0 g/s (ADR 

engine code), 1.8 to 4.0 g/s (AEB engine code). 

6 1. Engine speed - (read-out in steps of 10 rpm). - Maximum 2550 rpm. 

2. Idling speed controller. 

3. Lambda controller - -5 to 5% (ADP engine code), -10 to 10% (ADR 

and AEB engine codes). 


7 1. Lambda controller. 


3. Charcoal filter valve on/off ratio (Ratio indicated at 0 means 

activated charcoal filter solenoid valve 1 is closed). 

4. Lambda correction factor (see note below). 

NOTE: With active fuel tank breather system (ACF). Read-out of 0.3 indicates very rich 

mixture supplied from the ACF system thus the Lambda control will reduce the quantity 

of fuel injected to compensate, and vice-versa for a high reading. 

8 1. Injection time - 2.0 to 3.5 ms (ADP engine code), 2.0 to 5.0 ms 

(ADR engine code), 1.5 to 3.0 ms (AEB engine code). 

2. Lambda learning value for idling - -10 to 10% (ADP and ADR 

engine codes), -12 to 12% (AEB engine code). 

3. Lambda learning value for part throttle - -8 to 8% (ADP and ADR 

engine codes), -12 to 12% (AEB engine code). 

4. TE active or Lambda adaption (TE active indicates that the 

activated charcoal filter valve is pulsed, whilst Lambda adaption 

means that it is constantly closed). 

112


9 1. Engine speed (read-out in steps of 10rpm). - max. 2550 rpm. 

2. Lambda controller - -5 to 5% (ADP engine code), -10 to 10% (ADR 

and AEB engine codes). 

3. Lambda probe voltage 

4. Lambda learning value for idling - Adaptive. -10 to 10% (ADP and 

ADR engine codes), -12 to 12% (AEB engine code). 

10 1. Charcoal filter solenoid valve (on/off ratio). 

2. Lambda correction factor (see Note 1 below) 

3. Charcoal filter charge level (see Note 2 below). 

4. Charcoal filter purging rate (see Note 3 below). 

NOTE 1: With active fuel tank breather system (ACF). Read-out of 0.3 indicates very 

rich mixture supplied from the ACF system thus the Lambda control will reduce the 

quantity of fuel injected to compensate, and vice-versa for a high reading. 

NOTE 2: If -3 is displayed, Activated Charcoal Filter (ACF) contains no petrol vapour. If 

30 is displayed, ACF is completely filled with petrol vapour. 

NOTE 3: 0 indicates that the ACF solenoid valve is closed (no supply is drawn):0.3 

Indicates that 30% of inducted air comes from the ACF system. 

11 1. Engine speed (read-out in steps of 40 rpm). 

2. Engine load (see Note 1 below). 


4. Fuel consumption (see Note 2 below). 

NOTE 1: Injection time per revolution. 1.6 to 2.4 ms (ADP engine code), 1.0 to 2.5 ms 

(ADR and AEB engine codes). Maximum engine load decreases by approximately 

10% for every 1000 m above sea level; extremely hot outside temperatures likewise 

affect maximum engine load by up to 10%. 

NOTE 2: Read-out applies at idle, without ancillary loads. ADP engine code = 0.5 to 

1.1 l/h, ADR and AEB engine codes = 0.5 to 1.5 l/h. When driving at full throttle, the 

following minimum figures must be reached:- ADP engine code at 4000 rpm = 7.0ms, 

at 6000 rpm = 6.1ms. ADR engine code at 4000 rpm = 7.5ms, at 6000 rpm = 6.5ms. 

AEB engine code at 4000 rpm = 6.5ms, at 6000 rpm = 6.0ms. 

12 1. Engine speed (Read-out in steps of 10 rpm - Max 2550 rpm). 


3. Fuel consumption (see note below). 


NOTE: Read-out applies at idle, without ancillary loads. ADP engine code = 0.5 to 1.1 

l/h, ADR and AEB engine codes = 0.5 to 1.5 l/h. When driving at full throttle, the 

following minimum figures must be reached:- ADP engine code at 4000 rpm = 7.0 ms, 

at 6000 rpm = 6.1 ms. ADR engine code at 4000 rpm = 7.5 ms, at 6000 rpm = 6.5 ms. 

AEB engine code at 4000 rpm = 6.5 ms, at 6000 rpm = 6.0 ms 

113


13 1. Ignition angle retardation - cylinder 1 (retardation by knock control, 

active across complete engine speed range from a minimum 

engine load of 3 ms). 

2. Ignition angle retardation - cylinder 2 (retardation by knock control, 









14 1. Engine speed (Read-out in steps of 40 rpm). 

2. Engine load (injection time per revolution). 

3. Ignition angle retardation - cylinder1 (retardation by knock control, 



4. Ignition angle retardation - cylinder2 (retardation by knock control, 











16 1. Knock sensor signal - cylinder 1 (at idle; at high engine speeds, the 

signal voltage may achieve values up to 5.1 V). 

2. Knock sensor signal - cylinder 2 (at idle; at high engine speeds, the 






17 1. Engine speed (read-out in steps of 40 rpm. Specified as 820 to 900 

rpm for ADP engine code). 

2. Engine load (injection time per revolution. Specified as 1.0 to 2.5 

ms for ADP engine code). 

3. Read out dependent of engine code (see note below). 

4. Ignition angle (specified at 12° CA for ADP engine). 

NOTE: Distributor basic setting, for engine code ADP only:- the Hall sender signal 

position is set by turning the distributor, whilst the Modernity unit can process the signal 

within the range specified - maintain a range of -3 to 3° CA when setting. Energy 

balance for Cat heating, for engine code ADR only:- for rapid heating of the catalytic 

converter (when operating temp. is reached the energy balance will read 1or above). 

114



2. Engine load (injection time per revolution - engine load without 

altitude correction). 

3. Engine load (Ignition time per revolution - engine load with altitude 

correction). 

4. Altitude correction factor (see note below). 

NOTE: For engine code AEB only, this field will always indicate 0 as the system 

altitude correction is taken directly from the altitude sender, however, meteorological 

conditions may alter results significantly. 



3. Ignition angle retardation (retardation signal may not always be 

recognised because it is so brief). 


20 1. Engine speed. Read-out in steps of 10 rpm (max 2550 rpm). 

2. Selector level position (Automatic gearbox equipped vehicles, with 

Neutral or Drive selected. Manual gearbox equipped vehicles 

always display Drive position ON). 

3. Air conditioner type. - High or low heating/cooling capacity - on 

models without aircon, A/C High is always displayed when the 

heated rear screen is on. 

4. Air conditioner compressor status (compressor OFF is always 

displayed on vehicles fitted with aircon). 



3. Coolant temperature (see note below). 

4. Lambda control status (when Lambda control is switched OFF, the 

engine runs under map control). 

NOTE: At a starting temperature below 5°C, the Lambda control is not activated until 

coolant temperature reaches 5°C; above 5°C Lambda control is not activated until 

signal voltage is recognised. 

22 1. This display group is not relevant. 

23 1. Throttle operating conditions - when the first figure in the display is 

1, this indicates engine speed in steps of 40 rpm. Refer to Table 20 

for the relevance of the figures in line 1. 

2. Throttle valve positioner min. stop. 

3. Emergency throttle valve positioner stop. 

4. Throttle valve positioner max. stop. 




4. Ignition angle retardation (see note below). 

115


NOTE: Total of ignition angle retardation under knock control, cylinders 1 to 4. On 

engines with the code AEB, the turbo boost pressure is also reduced from a position of 

total ignition angle retardation of approx. 24° CA but retarding the ignition angle by 3° 

across all four cylinders has the same effect as retarding the ignition angle by 12° at 

only one cylinder. 

25 (This 

engine group 

should be 

disregarded 

for engine 

code AEB) 

1. Specified load without correction - this Display Group only relevant 

to engine code AEB. 

2. Specified load after correction (see Note 1 below). 

3. Actual load - if the actual load differs from the specified load after 

correction by more than 0.5 ms, there is a fault in the boost 

pressure control. 

4. Boost pressure control (see Note 2 below). 

NOTE 1: Injection time per revolution. Specified load reduced by conditional correction 

factors - total ignition retardation by knock control from 24° CA, altitude adaption 

(dependent on ignition map), and coolant temperature below 105°C. 

NOTE 2: Solenoid valve on/off ratio. If the difference between actual load and specified 

load after correction is greater than 1ms, the boost pressure control solenoid valve is 

actuated with a fixed on/off ratio of 5%. 

26 (This 

engine group 

should be 

disregarded 

for engine 

code AEB) 

27 (This 

engine group 

should be 

disregarded 

for engine 

code AEB) 

1. Idling speed controller - compensation for change of air mass 

percentage due to varying load at idling speed. 

2. Idling speed air mass learned - without Drive position engaged 

(automatic gearbox). 


4. Engine speed (read-out in steps of 40 rpm). 

1. Load reduction by knock control. 

2. Engine load after reduction. 

3. Engine speed (read-out in steps of 40 rpm). 

4. Boost pressure control - solenoid valve on/off ratio. If the total from 

engine load plus load reduction is equal to or > 8, this would 

indicate a fault in the air mass meter. 

28 1. Throttle pot. voltage 

2. Idling speed adjuster pot. voltage). 

3. Throttle valve control operating state. 

4. Throttle valve control adaption state - ADP running, ADP OK, or 

ADP error (ADP being the abbreviated form of adaption). 

116


Table 19 - Idle Speed Operating State 


X X X X X Display Group 4- line 4 

1 Idling speed 

1 Part throttle 

1 Full throttle 

1 Overrun 

1 Enrichment (full throttle enrichment) 

Table 20 - Throttle Operating Conditions - Adaption of Throttle Valve 

Control 


X X X X X X Display Group 23- line 1 

1 Engine speed (read-out in 

steps of 40) 

0 Adjustment of throttle valve 

potentiometer with 

potentiometer for idling speed 

positioner not OK 

1 Reading not relevant - ignore 

1 Learning of max. stop of 

throttle valve potentiometer no 

OK 

1 Learning of min. stop of 

throttle valve potentiometer 

not OK 

1 Learning of max. stop of 



1 Learning of min. stop of 



117


Engine Codes: ABT and ABM 


Group 




4. Operating status (refer to Table 2 for the relevance of the figures in line 

4). 












4. Fuelling requirements operating status (refer to Table 21 for the 



2. Activated charcoal valve duty cycle. 


4. Mixture correction. 

Table 21 - Fuelling Requirements Operating Status 


X X X X X Display Group 4 - Line 4 

1 Acceleration enrichment 

1 Full load 

1 Part load 

1 Idling 

1 Fuel cut-off on overrun 

Re-test the system 

118


Engine Codes: ABY 


Group 

1 1. Engine speed (with all electrical loads switched off). 


3. Lambda control (after approximately one and a half minutes). 

4. Ignition angle (calculated by - J220). 




4. Altitude compensation signal. 








4. Switch positions - indicated as OK if 00010 is displayed (only in idle 

condition). Idle switch - F60 defective if 00000 indicated. 


2. Idling speed stabilisation (zero point of the characteristic curve). 

3. Idling speed stabilisation (duty cycle). 

4. Switch positions - switch OK when 0000 is displayed (only with air 

conditioner switched off and no gear selected - automatics). 

6 1. This Display Group is not relevant. 

7 1. Idling speed stabilisation (working range). 

2. Idling speed stabilisation (characteristic curve zero point). 

3. Idling speed stabilisation (characteristic curve control). 

4. Idling speed stabilisation (load adaption). 

8 & 9 1. These display groups are not relevant 

119


Engine Codes: ACU 


Group 




4. Adjustment conditions (see Table 22 for the relevance of the figures in 

line 4). 







3. Throttle valve angle (calculated figure, dependent on throttle valve 


4. Idling stabilisation valve opening. 





4). 


2. Duty cycle (of activated charcoal filter solenoid valve). 

3. Consumption signal. 


6 1. Learned mixture adaption value (awaiting specification). 

2. Mixture adaption constant (awaiting specification). 

3. Learned idling stabilisation value (awaiting specification). 

4. Stored value for throttle pot. during basic setting. 

7 1. This display group is not relevant. 

120

Engine Codes: AAC for vehicles up to 02.92 


Group 






















Table 22 - Adjustment/Operating Conditions 


X X X X X X X X Display Group 1 - Line Display Group 4 - Line 

4 

4 


1 Signal from auto. 

gearbox 

Idling 

1 Aircon compressor on Part load 

1 Idling switch open Full load 

1 Lambda control fault Not relevant 

1 Throttle valve opened Not relevant 

1 Speed over 2300 rpm Not relevant 

1 Coolant temp. below 

80°C 

Not relevant 

121


Engine Codes: AAC for vehicles 03.92 on 


Group 





















122

Engine Codes: AAF for vehicles up to 09.91 


Group 


2. Intake manifold pressure. 
















2. Throttle valve potentiometer (G68). 




123


Engine Codes: AAF for vehicles 10.91on 


Group 

1 1. Coolant temperature 







4. engine load signal. 













124


Engine Codes: 1E 

Display 

Group 

Description 



3. Lambda probe voltage (fluctuating). 

4. Adjustment conditions (see Table 23 for the relevance of the figures in 

line 4). 






2. Engine load (25 to 38% at idling speed, with coolant temp. a minimum of 

80°C). 

3. Throttle valve angle (with ignition on, range 0 to 86°C). 

4. Idling stabilisation valve opening (3 to 25% at idling, with coolant temp. 

a minimum of 80°C) 


2. Engine load (25 to 38% at idling speed, with coolant temp. a minimum of 

80°C). 


4. Opening condition (see Table 23 for the relevance of the figures in line 

4). 



X X X X X X X X Display Group 1 - Line Display Group 4 - Line 

4 

4 


1 Not relevant Idling 

1 Aircon compressor on Part load 

1 Not relevant Full load 



1 Speed over 2500 rpm Not relevant 

1 Coolant temp. below 

80°C 

Not relevant 

125


Engine Codes: PY 


Group 



3. Lambda probe signal. 









4. CO potentiometer voltage. 








4. Battery voltage 

126

Engine Codes: 3F 


Group 



3. Lambda probe signal. 












3. Calculated ignition timing. 






Engine Codes: ABZ 


Group 




4. Injection angle. 



3. Air mass throughput. 






4 1. Throttle valve angle (absolute). 

2. Throttle valve angle (learned value). 


4. Operating state. 


127


5 1. Engine speed (actual - max. 2250 rpm). 

2. Engine speed (see note below). 

3. Air mass idling speed controller. 

4. Switch positions. 

NOTE: Specified. The basic 760 rpm speed specified is reduced to 600 rpm when a 

Drive position is engaged in an automatic gearbox, to prevent vehicle-creep. This 

reduction is partially cancelled if the rear screen heater or air conditioner is operating 

and idling speed is raised to 700 rpm. If no Drive position is engaged, the idling speed 

is raised to 800 rpm as a result of the air conditioner demanding a high cooling or 

heating capacity. Refer to Table 24 for the specified idling speed for the loading applied. 

6 1. Engine speed (actual - max. 2250 rpm). 

2. Air mass idle speed controller (see Note 1 below). 

3. Learning value of idling speed stabilisation (see Note 2 below). 

4. Switch position. 

NOTE 1: Learning process occurs in small steps each time the idling speed switch 

closes - blip the throttle approx. once every 10 seconds to open and close the switch. 

NOTE 2: Indicates the drift away from the designed average value (a new engine 

should have a positive value). 

7 1. Air mass inducted - specified air mass calculated by the control unit - 

engine idling. 

2. Air mass inducted - actual measured air mass - engine idling. Deviations 

of up to 0.3 g/s that last only a short time may be ignored. 

3. Current control factor - of idling speed stabilisation valve. Values above 

1.2 indicate a contact resistance between the control unit and the idling 

speed stabilisation valve. Values which greatly differ indicate fouling or 

jamming of the idling speed. 

4. Learning value of idling speed stabilisation. 

8 1. Engine speed (displayed in steps of 40 rpm). 

2. Engine load (see Note 1 below). 

3. Fuel consumption (see Note 2 below). 


NOTE 1: Read-outs of 80 to 100% are reached when driving at full throttle. Note that 

the maximum engine load decreases by approximately 10% for each 1000 m above 

sea level. 

NOTE 2: Read-out applies to engine idling without ancillary loads (i.e. auto gearbox, 

aircon/heating system, alternator, power steering pump). 


2. Engine specified torque 

3. Engine actual torque. 

4. Ignition angle retardation - retardation occurs to smooth the gearshift jolt 

by reducing the torque output. No ignition angle retardation occurs 

below 2000 rpm. 

128


10 1. Lambda learning value - bank 1 (engine idling). 

2. Lambda learning value - bank 2 (engine idling). 

3. Lambda learning value - bank 1 (at part load). 

4. Lambda learning value - bank 2 (at part load). 

11 1. Lambda control value - bank 1 (engine idling). 

2. Lambda control value - bank 2 (engine idling). 

3. Lambda control value - bank 1 (see note below). 

4. Lambda control value - bank 1 (see note below). 

NOTE: Because of the steep voltage jump between rich and lean, the control constantly 

fluctuates between the states 'slightly too rich' and 'slightly too lean'. 'Mixture rich' and 

'mixture lean' states exist at approximately 0.2V inside the maximum and minimum 

limits. 

12 1. Pulse duty cycle (see Note 1 below). 

2. Filling level (of activated charcoal filter). 

3. Lambda correction (see Note 2 below). 

4. Activated charcoal filter solenoid status (see Note 3 below). 

NOTE 1: Of activated charcoal filter solenoid valve 1 at idling speed. Above Idling 

speed the engine can process a higher quantity of fuel vapour from the ACF system, 

rising up to 100% under part load and full load conditions. 

NOTE 2: If fuel tank vent active. Once the flow of fuel vapour slows as the ACF system 

empties, the Lambda control enriches the mixture - by up to 18% for an empty system; 

Lambda control also leans off the mixture when the system initially has high fuel vapour 

concentrations. 

NOTE 3: Status of the valve. 'Active' indicates that the valve is pulsed for 6 minutes, 

'adaption' indicates that the valve is constantly closed for 1 minute. 

13 1. Ignition retardation by knock control (cylinder 1 - active from engine load 

greater than 40%). 

2. Ignition retardation by knock control (cylinder 2 - active from engine load 






14 1. Ignition retardation by knock control (cylinder 5 - active from engine load 








129


15 1. Knock sensor signal - cylinder 1 (at high engine speeds, the knock 

sensor signal voltage may achieve values of up to approximately 10V). 

2. Knock sensor signal - cylinder 2 (at high engine speeds, the knock 






16 1. Knock sensor signal - cylinder 5 (at high engine speeds, the knock 










3. Combustion misfire total (see note below). 

4. Flywheel ring gear-check 

NOTE: Misfiring recognition occurs across the entire speed range from an engine load 

of 15%. The display indicates the total number of combustion misfirings that occurred in 

the preceding 200 crankshaft revolutions - ideal read-out = 0. 

18 1. Flywheel ring gear check. 

2. Correction value - ring gear segment 2 



19 1. Combustion misfiring - cylinder 1 (see note below). 

2. Combustion misfiring - cylinder 2 (see note below). 




of 15%. The display indicates the number of combustion misfirings that occurred in the 

preceding 200 crankshaft revolutions for each cylinder individually. Ideal read-out = 0. 

20 1. Combustion misfiring - cylinder 5 (see note below). 





of 15%. The display indicates the number of combustion misfirings that occurred in the 

preceding 200 crankshaft revolutions for each cylinder individually. Ideal read-out = 0. 

21 1. Selector lever position. 

2. Aircon. status. 

3. Aircon. compressor status. 

4. Torque reduction during gearshift. 

130





4. Intake manifold change over (change over occurs at approximately 

4000 rpm if engine speed is rising, and at approximately 3700 rpm if 

speed is falling). 

131


Table 24 - Applied Loading/Idle Speed 

Drive position 

engaged 

Rear 

screen-heater 

on 

Air conditioner 

on 

Engine Codes: AAA for vehicles 92 on 


Group 



3. Lambda factor. 

4. Injection timing. 




4. EGR temperature (if applicable). 








4. Operating state (see the Table 25 for the relevance of the figures in line 

4). 


2. Idling stabilisation valve. 

3. Idling stabilisation valve duty cycle. 

4. Operating state (see the Table 25 for the relevance of the figures in line 

4). 

6 1. Lambda factor 

2. Lambda adaption (idling). 

3. Lambda adaption (part load). 

4. Lambda adaption (full load). 

132 

Specified idling 

speed 

No No No 760 rpm 

No Yes No 760 rpm 

No No Yes 800 rpm 

No Yes Yes 800 rpm 

Yes No No 600 rpm 

Yes Yes No 700 rpm 

Yes No Yes 700 rpm 

Yes Yes Yes 700 rpm




X X X X X Display Group 4 - Display Group 5 - 

Line 4 

Line 4 

1 Acceleration Air conditioning 

enrichment compressor on 

1 Full load Air conditioning on 

1 Part load Gearbox 

intervention - auto. 

only 

1 Idling Drive range 

1 Fuel cut-off on 

overrun 

Not relevant 

Re-test the system Not relevant 

Engine Codes: AAA for vehicles 96 on 


Group 



3. Lambda control. 





4. EGR status. 





4 1. Lambda control. 

2. Multiplicative Lambda adaption value. 

3. Additive Lambda adaption value. 

4. Tank venting adaption factor. 


2. Relative engine load. 




2. Idling control adaption requirement. 

3. Multiplicative learning value. 

4. Signal from aircon compressor (see Table 26 for the relevance of the 


133


Table 26- Compressor State 


X X X X X X X Display Group 6 - Aircon 

compressor signal 

1 Air-conditioning readiness 

1 Air conditioning compressor 

has cut in 

Engine Codes: AEE for vehicles 96 on 


Group 

1 1. Engine speed (see note below). 


3. Lambda probe voltage (fluctuating). 

4. Adjustment conditions (see the Table 27 for the relevance of the figures 

in line 4). 

NOTE: The specification must be attained with the coolant temperature at a minimum 

of 80°C, with all electrical ancillaries switched off. Specified for manual gearbox as 640 

to 740 rpm (or 830 to 930 rpm for vehicles with control unit 032 906 030D), and for 

auto. gearbox as 750 to 850 rpm. On both auto. and manual (without control unit 032 

906 030D), the idle speed is increased by the control unit if the battery voltage is too 

low or the air conditioner is switched on (up to 900 rpm), and after a long full throttle 

drive and higher temperatures (up to 960 rpm). 













2. Engine load (18 to 28% for manual gearbox, 18 to 29% for auto. 

gearbox). 


4. Throttle valve position - 17 to 27% for manual gearbox (17 to 33% for 

vehicles with control unit 032 906 030D), or 17 to 34% for automatic 

gearbox. 

134










2. Engine load (18 to 28% for manual gearbox, 18 to 29% for auto. 

gearbox). 

3. Speed signal. 


4). 









2. Duty cycle (of activated Charcoal Filter solenoid valve 1, with coolant 

temperature at a minimum of 80°C). 



6 1. Mixture correction value (fluctuating around 128, in a limitation range of 

80 to 150). 



4. Throttle valve potentiometer (stored value of basic setting; throttle valve 

closed). 

135


Table 27- Adjustment/Operating Conditions (automatic gearbox retards 

ignition for gear change) 

Relevant when '1' or '0' is displayed in the 8-digit block 

X X X X X X X X Display Group 1 - Line 

4 

136 

Display Group 4 - Line 

4 

1 Idling contact closed - 

1 AC compressor on Acceleration 

enrichment/lean 

mixture on 

deceleration 

1 Air conditioner on Full load 


(gearshift intervention 

in auto gearbox) 

- 

1 - Idling contact closed 

1 Driving stage 

(automatic gearbox) 

Overrun cut-off

Engine Codes: ACK, ALG 


Group 







3. Ignition duration. 

4. Intake air mass. 



3. Engine coolant temperature. 


4 Idling 

Stabilisation 

5 Idling 

Stabilisation 

6 Idling 

Stabilisation 



2. Idling intake mass learning valve (automatic gearbox with drive 

selected). 

3. Idling intake mass learning valve (manual gearbox in neutral - 

automatic gearbox in P or N). 

4. Operating mode (idle, part load, etc.). 

1. Actual engine speed. 

2. Specified engine speed. 

3. Idle air mass regulating valve. 



2. Injection duration. 

3. Bank 1 at idle - lambda learnt valve (additive) (see note below). 

4. Bank 2 at idle - lambda learnt valve (additive) (see note below). 

NOTE: A negative value indicates a rich mixture, whilst a positive value indicates a lean 

mixture 

7 Lambda 

Learnt Value 

1. Bank 1 at part throttle - lambda learnt value (multiplicative) (see 

note below). 

2. Bank 2 at part throttle - lambda learnt value (multiplicative) (see 

note below). 

3. Bank 1 at idle - lambda learnt value (additive) (see note below). 


137


NOTE: A low value indicates that the engine is running too rich and therefore the ECU 

is weakening the mixture. 

A high value indicates that the engine is running too weak and therefore the ECU is 

enriching the mixture. 

Additive: The effects of a fault (e.g. Intake air leak), will reduce as the engine speed 

increases, so the injection period will be modified by a fixed amount. This amount is not 

dependent on the basic injection duration period. 

Multiplicative: The effects of a fault (e.g. Injector fault) will increase as engine speed 

increases, so a multiplicative learnt value is a proportional change to the injection 

duration. The change is dependent on the basic injection duration period. 

8 Lambda 

Learnt Value 





NOTE: Additive: The effects of a fault (e.g. Intake air leak), will reduce as the engine 

speed increases, so the injection period will be modified by a fixed amount. This 

amount is not dependent on the basic injection duration period. 

9 Oxygen 

Sensor 

10 Fuel Tank 

Breather 

1. Oxygen sensor voltage - bank 1. 


3. EVAP canister purge valve duty cycle. 

4. Lambda correction factor while fuel tank venting is active. 


2. Lambda correction factor with tank breather active. 

3. EVAP canister charge level (see Note 1 below). 

4. Fuel tank venting system purge rate (see Note 2 below). 

NOTE 1: Display = - 5: canister empty Display = 95: canister full 

NOTE 2: Display = 0.5: no canister vapours ingested Display = 1.5: 30% of the intake 

air mass drawn from the canister 

11 Fuel 

Consumption 

12 Knock 

Control 

13 Knock 

Control 






2. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 1. 







138

14 Knock 

Control 

15 Knock 

Control 

16 Knock 

Control 

17 Knock 

Sensors 

18 Knock 

Sensors 

19 Torque 

Reduction 

(automatic 

gearbox) 

20 Operating 

Modes 

21 Lambda 

Control 













4. Total sum of ignition retardation cylinders 1 to 6. 


2. Knock sensor voltage - cylinder 1. 









3. Required engine torque. 

4. Actual engine torque. 


2. Automatic gearbox operating mode. 

3. A/C operating modes. 

4. A/C compressor status. 




4. Lambda control operating mode. 

22 1. This group is not relevant. 

23 Throttle 

Control part 

adaption 

24 Traction 

Control 

1. Learning requirement (for relevance of the figures in line 1 see 

Table 28). 

2. Throttle valve positioner minimum stop. 

3. Throttle valve positioner 'limp home' stop. 

4. Throttle valve positioner maximum stop. 


2. Reduction stages. 

3. Specified engine torque. 

4. Actual engine torque. 

139


25 System 

Status 

26 Camshaft 

Timing 

Adjustment 

27 System 

Status and 

Camshaft 

Timing 

Adjustments 



3. System status (for relevance of the figures in line 1 see Table 29). 

4. 



3. Camshaft position - bank 1. 


1. System status (for relevance of the figures in line 1 see Table 30). 

2. 







98 Throttle 

Control 

part-matching 

99 Lambda 

Regulation 

1. Throttle valve potentiometer voltage. 

2. Throttle valve positioner sensor voltage. 

3. Operating mode. 

4. Adaption status. 



3. Lambda regulation. 

4. Lambda regulation operating mode. 

140


Table 28 - Throttle Control Learning Requirement 

Relevant when '1' or '0' is displayed in the 8-digit block 

X X X X X X X X Display group 23 - Line 1 


1 Throttle valve positioner min. stop - learning 

process not carried out 

1 Throttle valve positioner max stop - learning 


1 Throttle valve potentiometer min. stop - learning 


1 Throttle valve potentiometer max stop - learning 



1 Throttle valve positioner to throttle valve 

potentiometer - balance not carried out 


Table 29 - Display group 25 System Status 


X X X Display group 25 - Line 3 

1 Camshaft timing adjustment active. 

1 Intake manifold change-over active. 

1 See WSM. 

Table 30 - Display Group 27 System Status 



1 Camshaft timing adjustment active. 

1 Intake manifold change-over active. 

1 See WSM. 

Engine Codes: ADR, AEB, AJL, AJP 


Group 







3. Ignition duration. 


141







2. Idling air mass learnt valve (automatic transmission in P or N). 

3. Idling air mass learnt valve (manual transmission in neutral or 

automatic in drive). 


5 Idling 

Stabilisation 

6 Idling 

Stabilisation 

7 Lambda 

Leant Values 

8 Lambda 

Leant Values 







3. Lambda regulator. 


1. Lambda regulator control value. 

2. Oxygen sensor voltage. 


4. Lambda correction factor whilst tank venting is active. 


2. Lambda learnt value at idle (additive) (see note below). 

3. Lambda learnt value at part load (multiplicative) (see note below). 

4. Fuel tank venting operating mode. 











9 Lambda 

Leant Values 

10 Fuel Tank 

Venting 


2. Lambda regulator control value. 


4. Lambda learnt value at idle (additive). 


2. Lambda correction factor during active fuel tank venting. 

3. Charge level of EVAP canister (see Note 1 below). 

4. Fuel tank venting system purge rate (see Note 2 below). 

142


NOTE 1: Value of -3 indicates that the canister is empty, 32 indicates it is full of 

vapours. 

NOTE 2: Value of 0.0 indicates that the purge valve is closed, 0.3 indicates that 30% of 

the intake air mass is from the EVAP canister. 

11 Fuel 

Consumption 

12 Fuel 

Consumption 

(code AJP) 

13 Knock 

Control 

(code AJP) 

14 Knock 

Control 

15 Knock 

Control 

16 Knock 

Control 

18 Altitude 

adaption 

19 Torque 

Reduction 

(automatic 

gearbox) 

20O 

perasting 

Modes 





















1. Cylinder 1 knock sensor voltage. 






3. Throttle valve angle (engine load). 

4. Altitude correction factor. 



3. Ignition angle retardation. 



2. Automatic gearbox operating mode. 

3. A/C operating mode. 

4. A/C compressor operating mode. 

143


21 Lambda 

Control 

23 Adaption 

of throttle 

Valve Control 

part 

24 Knock 

Control 

25 Intake 

change-over/ 

camshaft 

adjustment 

(code ADR/ 

AJP) 

25 Charge 

Pressure 

Control (AEB 

only) 

26 Camshaft 

Adjustment 




4. Lambda control operating mode. 

1. Learning requirement (for the relevance of this data see Table 31). 

2. Throttle valve minimum position. 

3. Throttle valve 'limp home' running position. 

4. Throttle valve maximum position. 




4. Sum of the cylinders 1 to 4 ignition retardation angles. 

1. Engine operating mode. 

2. Hall sensor adjustment deviation. 

3. Intake manifold/camshaft adjustment operating mode (for the 

relevance of this data see Table 32). 

4. Active camshaft adjustment angle. 

1. Specified engine load (from accelerator pedal). 

2. Specified engine load after correction by knock control etc. 

3. Actual engine load. 

4. Charge pressure limitation valve duty cycle. 



3. Intake manifold/camshaft adjustment operating mode. 






98 Matching 

Throttle 

Control part 

99 Lambda 

Regulation 


2. Throttle valve positioner potentiometer voltage. 

3. Engine operating mode. 

4. Throttle control part matching mode. 




4. Operating condition. 

144


Table 31 - Throttle Control Learning Requirements 


X X X X X X Display group 23 - Line 1 

1 Throttle valve positioner Min. 

stop signal - learning process 

(0=Learning process OK, 

1=Learning process required) 

1 Throttle valve positioner Max. 

stop signal - learning process 



1 Learning process throttle 

valve potentiometer Min. stop 



1 Learning process throttle 

valve potentiometer Max. stop 




1 Throttle valve potentiometer 

being balanced with throttle 

valve positioner (0=Balance 

required, 1=Balance OK) 

Table 32 - Intake Manifold/Camshaft Adjustment Operating Mode 



1 1= Camshaft advanced 

1 1= Long intake manifold track 


Engine Codes: 1Z (03.94-on), AEY, AFN, ALE, AVG 

Display Group Description 

1 Injected 1. Engine speed. 

Quantity 2. Injected quantity. 

3. Modulating piston movement sensor voltage. 


2 Idling Speed 1. Engine speed. 


3. Operating condition (for the relevance of this data see Table 33). 


145


3 EGR System 1. Engine speed. 

2. Specified intake air mass. 

3. Actual intake air mass. 

4. EGR valve duty cycle. 

4 Injection 

Commencemen 

t 

4 Injection 

Commencemen 

t at Full Throttle 

(3d gear) 

5 Starting 

Conditions 

6 Switch 

Positions 


2. Specified injection commencement. 

3. Actual injection commencement. 

4. Commencement-of-injection valve duty cycle. 






2. Starting injection quantity. 

3. Actual commencement of injection. 



2. Brake pedal monitor (for the relevance of this data see Table 34). 

3. Cruise control system (CCS) (for the relevance of this data see 

Table 35). 

4. Cruise control system. 

7 Temperatures 1. Fuel temperature. 

2. Not allocated. 



8 Limitation of 

Injection 

Quantity at full 

throttle (3rd 

gear) 


Injection 

Quantity 

10 Air 

Quantities at full 

throttle (3rd 

gear) 


2. Injected quantity (from accelerator pedal position). 

3. Injection quantity limitation (torque limitation). 

4. Injection quantity limitation (smoke prevention). 


2. Injection quantity (Cruise control system active). 

3. Injection limitation from automatic gearbox during gear change. 



2. Atmospheric pressure. 



146

11 Turbo 

Charge 

Pressure 

Control at full 

throttle (3rd 

gear) 



2. Specified turbo charge pressure. 

3. Actual turbo charge pressure. 

4. Charge pressure control valve solenoid duty cycle (see note 

below). 

NOTE: Engine code AEY: Throttle valve positioner duty cycle. 

12 Glow Plugs 1. Not allocated 

2. Pre-glow period. 

3. Supply voltage from control unit. 


13 Idle speed 

smooth running 

control (see 

note below) 

1. Difference in injected quantity between cylinders 4 and 3. 



4. 

NOTE: The injection system is equipped with an idle speed smooth running control. 

Any power differences between the cylinders is recognised and equalised via selective 

injected quantities. 

16 Additional 

Heating (AFN 

>08.97) 

1. Alternator loading. 

2. Additional heater conditions (for the relevance of this data see 

Table 36). 

3. Heater element activation (for the relevance of this data see 

Table 37). 

4. Control unit voltage supply. 

19 (code 1Z) 1. Modulating piston voltage at minimum stop. 

2. Modulating piston voltage at maximum stop. 

3. 

4. 

147


Table 33 - Group 2 Operating Conditions 




1 Idling switch closed 

1 Idle speed increased due to A/C 

Table 34 - Group 6 Brake Pedal Monitor 



1 Brake light switch closed 

1 Brake pedal switch open 

1 Clutch pedal switch open 

Table 35 - Group 6 Cruise Control Monitor 

Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 5 & 6-digit blocks 

All except code ALE 

X X X X X Display group 6 - Line 3 

1 CCS switched on 


1 Speed accepted again 

1 Brake pedal depressed 

1 Clutch pedal depressed 

Code ALE only 



1 1 Speed accepted 

1 1 Speed accepted again 

1 1 Brake pedal depressed 

1 1 Clutch pedal depressed 

148


Table 36 - Additional Heater Conditions 

Relevant when '1' is displayed in the 8-digit blocks 


1 Coolant temperature above 70 to 80°C, or intake 

air temperature above 5°C 

1 Alternator defective 

1 Battery voltage below 9V 

1 Engine speed below 760 rpm 

1 Engine start within the last 10 secs 

1 Coolant or Intake manifold temperature sensor 

defective 



Table 37 - Group 16 Heater Element Activation 


X X Display group 16 - Line 3 

1 Low heat output relay on 

1 High heat output relay on 

Engine Codes: AFB, AKE and AKN 

Display Groups Description 


Quantity 2. Injection quantity. 



2 Idle Speed 1. Engine speed. 


3. Operating conditions (for the relevance of this display line, see 

Table 38). 






4 Injection 1. Engine speed. 

Commencement 2. Specified injection commencement. 


4. Injection commencement valve duty cycle. 

149


4 Injection 

Commencement 

at full load 

5 Starting 

Conditions 

6 Switch 

Positions 




4. Injection commencement valve duty cycle. 


2. Starting quantity. 




2. Brake pedal position (for the relevance of this display line, see 

Table 39). 

3. Cruise control system (for the relevance of this display line, see 

Table 40). 

4. Cruise control system status (see note below). 

NOTE: Vehicles without cruise control = 255, Cruise control switched off = 0, Cruise 

control switched on = 1 


2. Oil temperature. 



8 Injection 

Limitation at full 

load 

9 Injection 

Limitation at full 

load 

10 Air Quantities 

at full load 

11 Turbo 

Charge 

Pressure 

Control 


2. Injection requirement from accelerator pedal. 

3. Injected quantity limitation (torque reduction). 

4. Injected quantity limitation (smoke prevention). 

1. Injection requirement from accelerator pedal. 

2. Injection limitation during gear change (automatic 

transmission). 

3. Injected quantity due to engine braking effect. 

4. Injection quantity limitation due to traction control. 








4. Charge pressure control valve duty cycle. 

12 Glow Plugs 1. 




150

13 Idle Speed 

Smooth 

Running Control 

(see note below) 


1. Injection quantity variation between cylinders 3 and 2. 


3. Not allocated 



Any power differences between the cylinders is recognised and equalised via 

selective injected quantities. 

14 Idle Speed 

Smooth 

Running Control 









15 Fuel 

Consumption 

18 Fuel Injection 

Pump 


2. Actual injection quantity. 

3. Fuel consumption 

4. Injection quantity requirement from accelerator pedal 

1. Injection pump voltage supply. 

2. Voltage supply from the ECU. 

3. Injection pump status (for the relevance of this display line, see 

Table 41). 

4. 

19 Starting 1. Injection pump speed. 

2. Start of delivery. 

3. Metering solenoid valve activation period. 

4. Fuel temperature 

20 Idling 1. Fuel quantity diagnosis operating conditions (for the relevance 

of this display line, see Table 42). 

2. Injection condition (for the relevance of this display line, see 

Table 43). 

3. Fuel pump status. 

4. Fault recognised (0 = no fault) 

125 Data Bus 

Communication 

1. Gearbox status (see note below). 

2. ABS status (see note below). 

3. Instrument cluster status (see note below). 

4. Air bag status (see note below). 

NOTE: Display = 1 when control units with active data bus are fitted 

151


Table 38 - Group 2 Idle Speed Operating Conditions 



1 A/C compressor switch on 


1 Idle switch closed 

1 Kick down switch closed 

1 System fault recognised 

Table 39 - Group 6 Brake Pedal Position Monitor 






Table 40 - Group 6 Cruise Control System Monitor 

Relevant when '1' and '0' are displayed in the 6-digit blocks 

All except code ALE 


0 0 0 0 0 0 CCS switched off 

0 0 0 0 0 1 CCS and memory switched off 

0 0 0 0 1 1 CCS switched on 

0 0 1 0 1 1 Resume speed again 

0 0 0 1 1 1 CCS button pressed 

0 1 0 0 1 1 Brake pedal depressed 

1 0 0 0 1 1 Clutch pedal depressed 

152


Table 41 - Fuel Injection Pump Status 



1 Constant voltage supply to metering solenoid 

valve 

1 Metering solenoid valve defective 

1 Injection pump speed sensor defective 

1 Timing adjustment defective 

1 Commencement of injection not recognised 

1 See WSM 

1 Engine speed not recognised 

1 Data wiring defective 

Table 42 - Fuel Quantity Diagnosis Operating Conditions 



1 'Refuel' warning from instrument cluster 

1 'Tank almost empty' signal from sender 

1 'Tank empty' signal from sender 

Table 43 - Group 20 Injection Conditions 



1 'Switch off' being prepared 


1 Engine start prevented due to low fuel 

level 

1 Engine stopped after starting due to low 

fuel level 

1 Engine stopped - no fuel 

Engine Codes: AFF, AHU and AHH 



Quantity 

2. Injection quantity. 



153


2 Idling Speed 1. Engine speed. 


3. Operating condition (for the relevance of this display line, see 

Table 44). 






4 Injection 

Commencement 

4 Injection 

Commencement 

at full throttle 

(3rd gear) 

5 Starting 

Conditions 

6 Switch 

Positions 










2. Starting injection quantity. 




2. Brake pedal monitor (for the relevance of this display line, see 

Table 45). 

3. Cruise control system (CCS) (for the relevance of this display 

line, see Table 46). 

4. Cruise control system (see note below). 

NOTE: Vehicles with cruise control = 0/1, without cruise control = 255 


2. 




Injection 

Quantity at full 

throttle (3rd 

gear) 


Injection 

Quantity 


2. Injected quantity (from accelerator pedal). 

3. Injected quantity limitation (torque limitation). 



2. Injection quantity (Cruise control system active). 

3. Injection limitation from automatic gearbox during gear change. 


154

10 Air Quantities 


(3rd gear) 

11 Turbo Charge 

Pressure Control 


(3rd gear) 







2. Specified charge pressure. 

3. Actual charge pressure. 

4. Turbo charge pressure control valve duty cycle. 

12 Glow Plugs 1. 




13 Idle smooth 

running control 




3. Difference in injected quantity between cylinders 1 and 3 

4. Difference between injection quantity between cylinders 1, 2, 4 

and 3 (code AFF) 




15 Fuel 

Consumption 

16 Additional 

Heater 

19 Quantity 

adjuster (AHH, 

AHU


Table 44 - Idling Speed Operating Conditions 





1 Idle speed increased due to A/C 

Table 45 - Group 6 Brake Pedal Monitoring 






Table 46 - Group 6 Cruise Control System Monitoring 





1 Speed accepted again 

1 Brake pedal depressed 

1 Clutch pedal depressed 

Table 47 - Group 16 Additional Heater Condition 










defective 



156


Table 48 - Group 16 Activation of Heater Elements 





Engine Codes: AJM, ATD and ATJ 


Groups 

1 Injected 

Quantity 


2. Injected quantity. 



2 Idle Speed 1. Engine speed. 


3. Operating condition (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 

49). 


3 EGR 

System 

4 Unit Injector 

Valve 

activation 

4 Unit Injector 

Valve 

activation at 

full load (3rd 

gear) 

5 Starting 

Conditions 

6 Switch 

Position 






2. Specified commencement of injection. 


4. Synchronisation angle. 


2. Specified commencement of injection. 


4. Synchronisation angle. 


2. Starting quantity 

3. Commencement of injection. 



2. Brake/clutch pedal positions (for the relevance of this display line, 

see Table 50). 


4. Cruise control system (CCS) (see note below). 

NOTE: Vehicles with cruise control = 0/1, without cruise control = 255 

157


7 

Temperatures 

8 Injected 

Quantity 

Limitation at 


gear) 

9 Injected 

Quantity 

Limitation 

10 Air 

Quantities at 


gear) 

11 Turbo 

Charge 

Pressure 

Control at full 

load (3rd 

gear) 

12 Glow Plug 

System 

13 Idle 

Smooth 

Running 

Control (see 

note below) 

1. Fuel temperature. 

2. Fuel cooling status 




2. Injected quantity. 

3. Injected quantity limitation (torque limitation). 



2. Injected quantity (CCS active). 

3. Injected quantity limitation from AT gearbox during gear change. 

4. Quantity limitation. 








4. Charge pressure control valve duty cycle. 

1. Glow status 




1. Smooth running control injected quantity - cylinder 1. 



4. Smooth running control injected quantity - cylinder 4 

NOTE: The injection system is equipped with an idle speed smooth running control. Any 

power differences between the cylinders is recognised and equalised via selective 

injected quantities. 

15 Fuel 

Consumption 

16 Additional 

Heater 


2. Actual injected quantity. 


4. Injection quantity requirement. 

1. Alternator loading. 

2. Additional heater (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 

51). 

3. Activation of heater elements (for the relevance of this display line, 



158

18 Unit 

injector valve 

status (see 

note below) 

1. Cylinder 1 injector status. 

2. Cylinder 2 injector status. 

3. Cylinder 3 injector status 

4. Cylinder 4 injector status 

NOTE: 0 = Unit injector OK 1 = Fault 

125 Data Bus 

Messages 

1. Gearbox status. 

2. ABS status. 

3. Instrument cluster status. 

4. Airbag status. 


Table 49 - Group 2 Idle Speed Operating Condition 





1 Idle speed increased due to A/ 

C 

Table 50 - Group 6 Brake/Clutch Pedal Positions 






Table 51 - Group 16 Additional Heater Condition 










defective 



159


Table 52 - Group 16 Activation of Heater Elements 





160


Engine Codes: ANA 


Code 

1 Lambda 1. Engine speed. 

Control 2. Engine coolant temperature. 

3. Lambda control (see note below) 


53). 

NOTE: Minus value indicates a weak mixture, positive value indicates a rich mixture 

2 Injection 1. Engine speed. 

Duration 2. Engine load. 



3 Ignition 1. Engine speed. 

Timing 2. Intake air mass (engine load). 

3. Throttle valve angle sensor 1. 


4 


Temperature 2. ECU supply voltage. 



5 Operating 1. Engine speed. 

Mode 2. Engine load. 



6 Altitude 1. Engine speed 

Correction 2. Engine load. 


4. Altitude correction factor (see note below). 

NOTE: At sea level value should be +5 to -10 

1000m value should be -5 to -20 

2000m value should be -10 to -30 





12 Distributor 1. Engine speed. 

Settings 2. Engine load. 

3. No. of the teeth on the crank sender wheel when the Hall sensor 

signal changes from - to + (see note below). 

4. No. of teeth on the crank sender wheel when the Hall sensor signal 

changes from + to - (see note below). 

161


NOTE: The engine speed sensor on the crankshaft transmits both the engine speed 

signal and a reference for crankshaft position. The reference signal is generated by a 

gap in the sender wheel. The Hall sensor rotor ring on the camshaft has a 180° division 

so that for half a camshaft revolution the window for the Hall sensor is covered, and for 

the other half revolution the window is exposed. To synchronise the components when 

starting, the ECU records the instant the Hall sensor rotor ring begins to cover the 

window (signal changes from - to +) and the instant the window begins to be exposed 

(signal changes from + to -). When the reference mark signal from the crank sensor is 

detected, the ECU counts the number of teeth on the crankshaft mounted sender 

wheel, As soon as it has counted between 26 an 30 teeth after the reference gap, the 

signal from the Hall sensor should change from - to +. After between 86 an 90 teeth, the 

Hall sensor signal should change from + to -. 

14 Misfire 

Recognition 



3. Misfire total (see note below). 

4. Misfire recognition status. 

NOTE: This specification is only valid for 5 mins after the engine has been started. 

15 Misfire 

Recognition 

16 Misfire 

Recognition 

20 Knock 

Control 

22 Knock 

Control 

23 Knock 

Control 

30 Lambda 

Regulation 

31 Oxygen 

Sensor 

1. Cylinder 1 misfire. 











4. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control - cylinder 4 









1. Lambda status pre-catalyst (for the relevance of this display line, 


2. Lambda status post-catalyst (for the relevance of this display line, 

see Table 54) 

1. Oxygen sensor actual voltage. 

2. Oxygen sensor specified voltage. 



162

32Lambda 

Learnt Values 


1. Lambda learnt value at idling speed (additive) (see note below). 














33 Lambda 

Regulation 

34 Lambda 

Regulation 

1. Pre-catalyst lambda regulation. 

2. Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor voltage. 




2. Catalyst temperature (see Note 1 below). 

3. Dynamic factor (see Note 2 below). 

4. Result of pre-catalyst oxygen sensor age test (see Note 2 below) 

NOTE 1: Calculated value from engine speed and load. 

NOTE 2: The dynamic factor is an Oxygen sensor ageing measurement. The ECU 

compares the adjustment frequency of the sensors' evaluation circuitry with a stored 

specification. If the value is not reached, the text 'B1-P1 n/OK' is displayed in zone 4. 

41 Lambda 

Regulation 

43 

Post-catalyst 

Oxygen 

Sensor 

46 Catalyst 

Diagnosis 

50 Idle Speed 

Regulation 

1. Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor internal resistance. 

2. Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor heating status. 

3. Post-catalyst oxygen sensor internal resistance. 

4. Post-catalyst oxygen sensor heating status. 


2. Catalyst temperature. 


4. Result of oxygen sensor test. 



3. Catalyst conversion measured value. 

4. Result of catalyst conversion test. 



3. A/C operating condition. 

4. A/C compressor operating condition. 

163


54 Idling 

Control 

55 Idling 

Control 

56 Idling 

Control 

60 Electronic 

Throttle 

System 

62 Electronic 

Throttle 

System 

63 Kick-down 

Adaption 

66 Cruise 

Control 

System 

(CCS) 



3. Accelerator pedal position sensor 1. 

4. Throttle valve angle sensor 1. 


2. Idle speed regulator. 

3. Idle speed stabilisation learning value. 


55). 



3. Idle speed regulator. 

4. Operating mode (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 

56). 

1. Throttle valve angle (sensor 1). 


3. Learning step counter (see WSM) 

4. Adaptation condition. 



3. Accelerator pedal position (sensor 1) 

4. Accelerator pedal position (sensor 2). 

1. Hold down the accelerator pedal. 




1. Actual vehicle speed. 

2. Brake, clutch and CCS switch positions (for the relevance of this 

display line, see Table 57). 

3. Specified vehicle speed (last value stored by CCS). 

4. CCS switch position (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 

58). 

164

70 EVAP 

System 

Diagnosis 


1. EVAP canister solenoid valve duty cycle. 

2. Lambda regulation during TVV diagnosis (see note below). 

3. Idle speed deviation during TVV diagnosis. 

4. Result of diagnosis (see note below). 

NOTE: TVV = Fuel tank vent valve 

Negative valve = Canister full. 

Positive value = Canister empty. 

77 Secondary 1. Engine speed. 

Air Injection 2. Engine coolant temperature. 

System 3. Not allocated 

4. Result of test. 

86 Readiness 1. Readiness code (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 

Code 

59). 




95 Variable 1. Engine speed. 

Intake 2. Engine load. 

Manifold 3. Engine coolant temperature. 

4. Variable manifold status (see note below). 

NOTE: During rapid accelerator operation (up to 2000 rpm), the status must change 

from OFF to ON. 

99 Lambda 1. Engine speed. 

Regulation 2. Engine coolant temperature. 


4. Lambda regulator operating condition. 

120 Traction 1. Engine speed. 

Control 2. Specified engine load. 


4. Status. 

122 


Automatic 2. Specified engine load. 

Transmission 3. Actual engine load. 

4. Status. 

165


Table 53 - Group 1 Operating Condition 



1 Coolant temperature above 80°C 

1 Speed below 2000 rpm 


1 Lambda regulation OK 


1 A/C compressor switch off 


1 No faults recognised 

Table 54 - Group 30 Lambda Regulation 


X X X Display group 30 - Lines 1 & 2 

1 Lambda regulation active 

1 Oxygen sensor operationally 

ready 

1 Oxygen sensor heating on 





1 Selected gear 

1 A/C system switched on 

X Not relevant 

1 PAS pressure switch on 

Table 56 - Group 56 Idle Control Operating Mode 








166


Table 57 - Group 66 Brake/Clutch Switch Monitor 


X X X X Display group 66 - Line 2 

1 Brake depressed (brake light switch) 

1 Brake depressed (brake pedal switch) 

1 Clutch depressed (AT: always 1) 

1 Cruise control system operational (CCS) 

Table 58 - Group 66 Cruise Control Switch Monitor 



1 CCS sliding switch at off (switch locked) 

1 CCS sliding switch at off (switch unlocked) 

1 'SET' button depressed 

1 CCS sliding switch at 'RES' 

Table 59 - Group 86 Readiness Code 



0 Catalyst 

0 Catalyst heating 

0 EVAP system 

0 Secondary air system 


0 Oxygen sensor 

0 Oxygen sensor heating 

0 EGR system 

Engine Codes: ANB, APT, APU and ARG 


Group 



3. Lambda control (see note below). 


60). 

NOTE: Minus value indicates a weak mixture, positive value indicates a rich mixture. 





167






















14 Misfire 

Recognition 

(code: ANB) 

22 Knock 

Control 

23 Knock 

Control 

30 Lambda 

Regulation 

32 Lambda 

Regulation 



3. Misfire total. 

4. Misfire recognition. 







3. Retardation of ignition timing by knock control cylinder 3. 


1. Pre-catalyst lambda regulation status (for the relevance of this 


2. Post-catalyst lambda regulation status (for the relevance of this 




1. Lambda learnt value at idling speed (additive) (see note below). 




168


NOTE: A low value indicates that the engine is running too rich and therefore the ECU is 

weakening the mixture. 


enriching the mixture 







33 Lambda 

Regulation 

34 Lambda 

Regulation 

(code: ANB) 

1. Pre-catalyst lambda regulator. 

2. Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor voltage. 




2. Catalyst temperature (see Note 1 below). 

3. Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor cycle duration. 

4. Result of pre-catalyst oxygen sensor age test (see Note 2 below). 

NOTE 1: Calculated value from engine speed and load 

NOTE 2: The ECU compares the adjustment frequency of the sensors' evaluation 

circuitry with a stored specification. If the value is not reached, the text 'B1-P1 n/OK' is 

displayed in line 4. 

37 Lambda 

Regulation 

(code ANB) 

41 Oxygen 

sensor 

heating 

46 Catalyst 

Diagnosis 

(code ANB) 

99 Lambda 

Regulation 

Operating 

Conditions 

50 Idle Speed 

Regulation 


2. Post-catalyst oxygen sensor voltage. 

3. Pre-catalyst lambda regulation dwell period. 

4. Test result. 

1. Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor heater resistance. 

2. Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor heater status. 

3. Post-catalyst oxygen sensor heater resistance. 

4. Post-catalyst oxygen sensor heater status. 



3. Amplitude ratio. 

4. Test result. 







3. A/C operating mode. 


169


54 Idling 

Control 

55 Speed 

Regulation 

56 Speed 

Regulation 

60 Electronic 

Throttle 

System 

62 Electronic 

Throttle 

System 

62 Electronic 

Throttle 

System 

kick-down 

adaption 

66 Cruise 

Control 

System 

(CCS) 

70 EVAP 

System (code 

ANB) 

77 Secondary 

Air Injection 

System (code 

ANB) 






2. Idling regulator. 

3. Idling regulator learnt value. 


62). 





63). 



3. Learning step counter. 

4. Adaptation condition. 



3. Accelerator pedal position (sensor 1) 





4. 

1. Actual vehicle speed. 



3. Specified vehicle speed (last value stored by CCS). 

4. Position of CCS controls switch (for the relevance of this display 



2. Lambda regulation deviation during tank vent valve diagnosis. 





3. Secondary air injection air mass 


170

91 Camshaft 

Adjustment 

(non-turbo) 

95 Variable 

Manifold 

(non-turbo) 

100 

Readiness 

Code (code 

ANB) 

114 Turbo 

Charge 

Pressure 

Control 



3. Operating mode of camshaft adjustment. 





4. Status. 


1. Readiness code (for the relevance of this display line, see Table 

66). 


3. Period since last engine start. 

4. Diagnosis status. 

1. Specified engine load. 

2. Specified engine load after correction (see note below). 


4. Charge pressure control solenoid duty cycle. 

NOTE: Reduced after knock control, altitude adaption and coolant temperature 

regulation. 

115 Turbo 

Charge 

Pressure 

Control 

117 Turbo 

Charge 

Pressure 

Control 

118 Turbo 

Charge 

Pressure 

Control 

120 Traction 

Control 











3. Turbo charge pressure control valve duty cycle. 





4. Status. 

171


Table 60 - Group 1 Operating Condition 



1 Coolant temperature above 80°C 

1 Speed below 2000 rpm 


1 Lambda regulation OK 


1 A/C compressor switch off 


1 No faults recognised 

Table 61 - Group 30 Lambda Regulation Status 





ready 


Table 62 - Group 55 Speed Regulation Operating Condition 








Table 63 - Group 56 Speed Regulation Operating Mode 








172
















Table 66 - Group 100 Readiness Code 



0 Catalyst 

0 Catalyst heating 

0 EVAP system 

0 Secondary air system 


0 Oxygen sensor 

0 Oxygen sensor heating 

0 EGR system 

Engine Codes: APR and AQD 


Group 



3. Lambda regulator - Bank 1 (see note below). 

4. Lambda regulator - Bank 2 (see note below). 

NOTE: Bank 1 = cylinders 1, 2 and 3 

Bank 2 = cylinders 4, 5 and 6 





173













4. Operating mode (idle, part load). 









22 Knock 

Control 

23 Knock 

Control 

24 Knock 

Control 

28 Knock 

Control 

30 Lambda 

Regulation 
















4. Result of knock sensor test. 

1. Oxygen sensor status - Bank 1 (for the relevance of this display line, 



3. Oxygen sensor status - Bank 2 (for the relevance of this display line, 



174

31 Oxygen 

Sensor 

Voltage 

32 Lambda 

Learnt 

Values 

1. Oxygen sensor status - Bank 1. 


3. Oxygen sensor status - Bank 2. 



1. Idle speed lambda learnt values - Bank 1 (additive) (see note 

below). 

2. Part load lambda learnt values - Bank 1 (multiplicative) (see note 

below). 

3. Idle speed lambda learnt values - Bank 2 (additive) (see note 

below). 

4. Idle speed lambda learnt values - Bank 2 (multiplicative) (see note 

below). 











33 Lambda 

Regulation 

Values 

99 Lambda 

Regulation 

50 Idle 

Speed 

Regulation 

54 Idle 

Speed 

Control 

55 Idle 

Speed 

Stabilisation 

1. Lambda regulation - Bank 1. 

2. Oxygen sensor voltage - Bank 1. 

3. Lambda regulation - Bank 2 

4. Oxygen sensor voltage - Bank 2 




4. Lambda regulation operating mode. 



3. A/C system operating mode. 




3. Accelerator pedal position - sensor 1. 

4. Throttle valve angle - sensor 1. 



3. Idle regulator learning value. 


68). 

175


56 Idle 

Speed 

Stabilisation 

60 Electronic 

Throttle 

System 

61 Electronic 

Throttle 

System 

62 Electronic 

Throttle 

System 

63 Electronic 

Throttle 

System - kick 

down 

adaption 

66 Cruise 

Control 

System 

(CCS) 

120 Traction 

Control 

System 



3. Idle regulator. 


69). 



3. Learning step counter. 

4. Adaption condition. 





70). 












3. Specified road speed (last value stored by CCS). 

4. Position of CCS control switch (for the relevance of this display line, 




3. Measured engine load 

4. Status. 

176


Table 67 - Group 30 Lambda Regulation 





ready 


Table 68 - Group 55 Idle Speed Operating Mode 








Table 69 - Group 56 Idle Speed Operating Mode 








Table 70 - Group 61 Electronic Throttle Operating Mode 








177
















Engine Codes: AHL and ARM 





4. Adjustment condition for matching throttle valve (for the 

relevance of this display line, see Table 73). 




4. Engine operating conditions (for the relevance of this display 





4. Throttle valve positioner duty cycle. 


2. Intake air mass (engine load). 







178

6 Altitude 

Correction 

7 Idling 

Adjustment 

8 Idling 

Stabilisation 

9 Idling Air 

Requirements 

10 Lambda 

Regulation and 

EVAP System 

11 Lambda 

Learning Values 

12 Lambda 

Control 

13 Fuel 

Consumption 

14 Knock 

Control 

15 Knock 

Control 

1. Engine speed 






2. Idling control learnt value (transmission in Neutral or Park). 

3. Idling control learnt value (automatic transmission drive gear 

selected). 

4. Engine operating condition (for the relevance of this display 




3. Idling control. 


1. Idling control. 

2. Throttle valve control part operating status (for the relevance of 

this display line, see Table 76). 






4. Lambda correction factor whist tank venting is active. 


2. Lambda learnt value at idle. 

3. Lambda learnt value at part load. 

4. Tank vent valve condition (for the relevance of this display line, 


















179


16 Knock 

Control 

17 Knock 

Control 

18 Torque 

Reduction 

(automatic 

transmission) 

19 Operating 

Conditions 

20 Lambda 

Control 

Operating 

Conditions 

21 Throttle 

Valve Control 

part adaption 

condition 

22 Position of 

Camshaft in 

relation to the 

Crankshaft 











3. Retardation of ignition timing for gearbox 'cut-in'. 



2. Selector lever position (0=Neutral). 

3. A/C system (0=off). 

4. A/C compressor (0=off). 




4. Lambda control operating conditions (for the relevance of this 


1. Throttle valve control part operating condition (for the relevance 

of this display line, see Table 79). 

2. Throttle valve minimum position. 

3. Throttle valve 'limp home' running position. 

4. Throttle valve maximum position. 



3. No. of teeth on the crank sender wheel when the Hall sensor 

signal changes from - to + (see note below). 

4. No. of teeth on the crank sender wheel when the Hall sensor 

signal changes from + to - (see note below). 

NOTE: The engine speed sensor on the crankshaft transmits both the engine speed 

signal and a reference for crankshaft position. The reference signal is generated by a 

gap in the sender wheel. The Hall sensor rotor ring on the camshaft has a 180° 

division so that for half a camshaft revolution the window for the Hall sensor is 

covered, and for the other half revolution the window is exposed. To synchronise the 

components when starting, the ECU records the instant the Hall sensor rotor ring 

begins to cover the window (signal changes from - to +) and the instant the window 

begins to be exposed (signal changes from + to -). When the reference mark signal 

from the crank sensor is detected, the ECU counts the number of teeth on the 

crankshaft mounted sender wheel, as soon as it has counted between 26 an 30 teeth 

after the reference gap, the signal from the Hall sensor should change from - to +. 

After between 86 an 90 teeth, the Hall sensor signal should change from + to -. 

180

98 Matching 

Throttle Control 

part 

99 Lambda 

Regulation 



2. Throttle valve positioner potentiometer voltage. 

3. Throttle control part operating condition (for the relevance of 

this display line, see Table 80). 

4. Throttle control part matching condition (for the relevance of this 





4. Operating condition (for the relevance of this display line, see 

Table 82). 

Table 73 - Group 1 Adjustment Condition 



1 Coolant temperature below 80°C 

1 Engine running 

1 Throttle valve open 

1 Fault in lambda control 

1 Idle switch open 


1 Signal from automatic gearbox 

1 Fault recognised 

Table 74 - Group 2 Engine Operating Conditions 





1 Idling 

1 Overrun 

Table 75 - Group 7 Engine Operating Conditions 





1 Idling 

1 Overrun 

181


Table 76 - Group 9 Throttle Valve Operating Conditions 





1 No current supply to throttle control part 


Table 77 - Group 11 Tank Vent Valve Condition 



1 Tank vent valve closed 

1 Tank vent valve minimum operating level 

1 Tank vent valve operating normally 

1 Vapour content check via tank vent valve 

1 Transition to tank vent valve closure 

1 Transition to tank vent valve minimum operating 

level 

1 Transition to vapour content check via tank vent 

valve 


Table 78 - Group 20 Lambda Control Operating Conditions 



1 Mixture status (1 = rich, 0 = lean) 

1 Oxygen sensor functioning 

1 Lambda control switched on 

1 Lambda control at limit 

1 Restricted operating mode 



1 Fault recorded during diagnosis 

182


Table 79 - Group 21 Throttle Valve Operating Condition 







Table 80 - Group 98 Throttle Valve Operating Condition 







Table 81 - Group 98 Throttle Valve Matching Condition 



1 Throttle control part is being matched 


Table 82 - Group 99 Lambda Regulation Operating Conditions 



1 Mixture status (1 = rich, 0 = lean) 

1 Oxygen sensor functioning 

1 Lambda control switched on 

1 Lambda control at limit 

1 Restricted operating mode 



1 Fault recorded during diagnosis 

Engine Codes: AGA, AJG, ALF and ALW 


Group 



3. Lambda control - bank 1. 


183




3. Average injection duration. 


4 Intake Air 

Temperature 

at idle speed 

5 Vehicle 

Speed 

30 Oxygen 

Sensor 

32 Lambda 

Learnt Values 








4. Engine operating status (part load, idle, etc.). 

1. Oxygen sensor status - bank 1. 

2. 

3. Oxygen sensor status - bank 2. 


1. Lambda learnt value at idle speed - bank 1 (additive) (see note 

below). 

2. Lambda learnt value at part throttle - bank 1 (multiplicative) (see 

note below). 

3. Lambda learnt value at idle speed - bank 2 (additive) (see note 

below). 

4. Lambda learnt value at part throttle - bank 2 (multiplicative) (see 

note below). 











33 Lambda 

Regulation at 

idle speed 

50 Signals to 

Engine ECM 







3. A/C status. 


184

54 Idle Speed 

Switch 



2. Engine operating condition (idle, part load, etc.). 


4. Throttle valve positioner angle. 




4. Operating conditions (for the relevance of this display line, see 

Table 83). 

90 Camshaft 

Timing 

Control 

93 Hall 

Senders 

95 Intake 

Manifold 

Change-over 


2. Camshaft timing control status. 

3. Feedback signal for adjustment - bank 1. 

4. Feedback signal for adjustment - bank 2. 



3. Phase position - bank 1. 

4. Phase position - bank 2. 




4. Intake manifold change-over status (see note below). 

NOTE: Intake manifold change-over should occur at approximately 4500 rpm. 

98 Throttle 

Control part 

adaption 

122 Torque 

Reduction 

during 

Gearshift 

1. Throttle valve angle sensor voltage. 

2. Idle speed positioner voltage. 

3. Engine operating status (idle, part load, etc.). 

4. Adaption status. 


2. Specified gearbox torque. 

3. Engine torque. 

4. Ignition timing reduction status. 

185





0 0 = A/C compressor off 

1 = A/C compressor on 

0 Gear selector position: 

0 = P or N 

1 = 2, 3, 4, R or D 

0 Maximum hot/cold air output 

0 Always 0 

ECU Version (VAG Mode 1) 

Selecting 'ECU Version' displays the following data for the selected control module: 

• Part Number 

• System Name 

• Version Number 

• Coding 

• Extra ID 

Part Number 

An alphanumerical code used by VAG to identify a particular 'make' and 'model' of 

vehicle. 

System Name 

Additional identification information for the ECM in 'plain text' containing the module 

name and part of the version number. 

Version Number 

A four-digit number identifying the module software version number. 

Coding 

Vehicle specific module configuration. 

Extra ID 

Two data fields for extra identification (VIN) and immobiliser. 

186

Actuators (VAG mode 3) 


This function allows component activation (Injectors, Solenoid valves, Relays etc.) in 

the sequence determined by the ECM. The Technician can use this function to test 

the electrical circuit of available actuators or to investigate where faults lie when an 

actuator fails to actuate. 

For the Actuators function to perform appropriately the ignition must be switched on 

with the engine not running. If actuation is required for the ENG Electronics 1,2 or 3, 

the engine temperature must be at a minimum of 80°C (176°F) to ensure that all of 

the injectors are activated. For each actuator the activation process will run for 

approximately 1 minute unless the test process is advanced to the next actuator by 

pressing the tick key to accept. 

Preliminary requirements 

1. Ignition On, Engine not running. 

2. Engine temperature at a minimum of 80°C (176°F). (If applicable) 

3. The ECM is functioning correctly. 

4. The required channel is available. 

Performing Actuator test 

1. Connect the OmiCheck to the vehicle's diagnostic socket. 

2. Select the particular system (i.e. ENG Electronics1) from the SYSTEM MENU 

and wait for diagnostic communication. 

3. From the FUNCTIONS MENU select ' Actuators' and follow the screen prompt. 

4. After the first actuator has been actuated, the actuator identification will be 

displayed on the OmiCheck display. 

5. To activate the next actuator in the pre-determined sequence, press the key. 

6. When the last actuator in the sequence is activated the OmiCheck will then 

display "END". 

7. If the activation process is to be repeated, the engine must be started such that 

the ECM detects an engine speed greater than 300 rpm. 

NOTE: The actuator function can be performed on any ECM that has actuators 

associated with it. During the activation process the electric fuel pump will run 

continuously. For each ECM the sequence and duration of each activation is 

pre-determined by the ECM. 

187


Basic Settings (VAG mode 4) 

This function allows the technician to view and change base/learned values relating 

to ignition timing, idle speed, mixture, etc. The Basic settings function can also be 

used to ensure that the ECM can adapt or re-learn the engine operating conditions 

within a short period of time. 

Based on the engine code, some ECMs do not have provisions for adjustment of 

basic settings using a diagnostic tool. For these ECMs, the operating parameters are 

pre-stored in the ECM and adapt as the engine operational conditions change. 

If the learned values are erased the ECM will revert to the default values for each of 

the operating parameters, which may not match the engine current operating status. 

This may result in temporary poor engine performance. If the engine is operated over 

a long period, the ECM will re-learn and adapt to the engine. However, with the use 

of a diagnostic tool the ECM can be made to adapt to the engine within minutes. 


1. Vehicle stationary. Hand brake/parking brake on. 

2. Engine running at idle. 

3. Accelerator pedal at rest. 

4. Fault memory must be erased. 

5. All electrical consumers switched off. (Coolant fan must not run during basic 

settings). 

6. Air conditioning system must be switched off. 

7. Engine temperature at a minimum of 80°C (176°F). 

After initiating basic settings 

After initiating basic settings the OmiCheck will: 

1. Switch off A/C compressor. 

2. Switch off the EVAP canister purge regulator system. 

3. Stabilise idle speed. 

4. Stabilise ignition speed. 

188

Performing basic settings 



2. Select 'ENG Electronics'1 from the SYSTEM MENU and wait for diagnostic 

communication. 

3. From the FUNCTIONS MENU select 'Read DTCs' and erase any existing fault 

codes. 

4. Return to the FUNCTIONS MENU and select 'Basic settings' and enter display 

group 0. Press the tick key to display the stored data values. 

5. Using the accelerator pedal, increase engine speed to slightly above idle speed 

for 5 seconds and then allow engine to idle for 2 to 3 minutes. 

6. Check the OmiCheck display to ensure that the values are within the vehicle 

specifications based on the engine code. 

If the displayed data is within the specification and the coolant fan has not run during 

the test, basic settings are complete. If the displayed data is out of range rectify the 

fault and re-start the process. 

Re-Coding (VAG Mode 7) 

Provided that a module can be re-coded, this mode allows for the coding of a 

replacement control module or changing previously stored incorrect coding. Coding 

is stored either as 7-bit (0000000 - 1048575) or 5-bit (00000 - 32767). New code 

numbers can be entered via the OmiCheck. 

Once OmiCheck has established a data link with a module it will evaluate the module 

coding. Dependent on the protocol used, KeyWord 1281, KeyWord 2000 or CAN, the 

module will indicate whether it can be re-coded. KeyWord 1281 protocol identification 

will display P-M-C and the Work Shop Code (WSC) 00000 if re-coding is not 

supported. KeyWord 2000 or CAN protocols will display 'Function not supported' if 

re-coding not possible. 

Where re-coding is supported, on-screen instructions are displayed to guide the user 

through re-coding. The OmiCheck recognizes 20 or 15 bit coding and will modify input 

requirements accordingly. 

WARNING: Before re-coding a module, record original code number in case 

new code number is not accepted. 

As an example, a instrument panel control module has a code 01402 that has the 

following meaning: 

• 01 - Brake pad wear sensor - warning active 

• 4 - UK 24 hr. clock and odometer in miles for cluster (2000+) 

• 3 - No service interval (only for 2002+ models) 

• 1 - Distance impulse number (k value) 

189


Re-coding an ECM 


1. Ignition on, engine not running 

2. ECM supports re-coding 

3. OmiCheck 

Re-coding Procedure 


2. From the 'Systems Menu', select relevant control module and wait for data link to 

be established. 

3. From the 'Functions Menu', select 'Re-coding' - follow on-screen instructions. 

NOTE: KeyWord 1281 protocol requires 5 digits, including leading zeroes as 

appropriate, KeyWord 2000 and CAN protocol requires 7 digits, including leading 

zeroes. 

4. Ensure that the correct number sequence is entered and if accepted by the 

module the display will indicate the new code, if code is incorrect the original 

code is retained and an error message is displayed. 

NOTE: There is no restriction on the number of attempts allowed to re-code a module. 

The original code is stored in the module data and is displayed by the OmiCheck on 

establishing a data link. 

WARNING: The original code can only be restored by re-entering the code 

following the procedure above. 

Adaptation (VAG Mode 10) 

This function not only allows the resetting of service intervals, but also certain values 

and settings in the control modules that supports it, i.e. gauge values, mixture trims, 

etc. Adaptation is carried out by selecting a channel number. There are three steps 

to changing adaptation values: 

1. Read adaptation 

2. Test adaptation 

3. Save adaptation 

Read Adaptation 

Read adaptation will read and display adaptation data from a selected ECM 

adaptation channel. When a channel number is selected by the technician and the 

key has been pressed the ECM will respond with the value that is currently stored in 

that channel. 

190

Test Adaptation 


Test adaptation allows the newly entered adaptation value to be tested on the engine, 

in order to achieve the correct setting for the required running condition. When the 

new adaptation value is entered and the key is pressed the ECM temporarily stores 

the value. If a measured value block is assigned to the channel it will be displayed. 

Save Adaptation 

Save adaptation allows the new adaptation value to be stored in the selected channel. 

If the technician decides to permanently store the new adaptation value to the ECM, 

having pressed the key, the new value is stored in the channel and is then used by 

the engine. 


1. Ignition On, Engine not running. 

2. The ECM is functioning correctly. 

3. The required channel is available. 

Performing Adaptation test 


2. Select the required ECM from the SYSTEM MENU (the selection should be 

based on the type of adaptation that needs to be performed) follow the screen 

prompts and wait for diagnostic communication. 

3. From the FUNCTIONS MENU select 'Adaptation', then select the 'Manual Reset' 

option (if applicable). Enter the channel number and follow the on-screen 

instructions. 

4. If a measured value block is assigned to the channel, by pressing the arrow, 

the OmiCheck will display the measured value. 

5. If the technician needs to change the current value, by pressing the key the 

technician would be able to enter the data in a five digit format. For example, if 

the number 15 needs entering the technician must enter 00015 using the , 

and key where appropriate. 

6. Having tested the new value the Technician can save the new value by pressing 

the key. 

7. The OmiCheck will then display the new value that is stored in the selected 

channel. 

8. If the technician needs to clear all learned values and revert back to the baseline 

values, channel number '0' needs to be entered when prompted. 

NOTE: Adaptation function should be used by Technicians who are aware of the 

results of changing baselines/learn values to the engine operations. 

191


Variable Service Reset 

For some models post 2000 MY, variable service reset should be used. To reset the 

service interval, enter 00000 into service reset channel 2 to clear the service 

counters. 

The channels 40, 41, 42, 43, 44 and 45 are used on installing a new instrument pack. 

Old values are entered into the new instrument pack to ensure that vehicle servicing 

is carried out at the correct intervals. 

Service Type Adaption 

Channel 

Counter Contents Adaption Value to 

Reset 

Service 2 Reset service counters 

(distance and time) 

00000* 

40 Distance travelled since 

last service in 100s of km 

00000 

41 Time elapsed since last 

service in days 

00000 

42 Lower limit for distance to 


----- 

43 Upper limit for distance to 


----- 

44 Upper limit for time to 


----- 

45 Quality of engine oil ----- 

NOTE: * This value must be entered manually. Other adaption channels will 

automatically reset. 

Login to ECM (VAG Mode11) 

Some ECMs may require a valid login code to be entered before allowing some 

actions such as re-coding, adaptation values, coding cruise control, A/C etc. 

Each vehicle control module has a unique login code that is stored in the 'Vehicle 

Factory Repair Manual' or can be obtained from a VAG dealer. The login code is a 5 

digit number between 0 and 65535 and is entered via the OmiCheck. If the login is 

accepted 'Code Accepted' is displayed, if, however, the login code is incorrect the 

response depends upon the protocol: 

• KeyWord 1281 - Communication between the OmiCheck and the module will be 

broken and the message 'Datalink error, Login lost - Please check the code 

entered then retry' (the control module will need to be reset by switching the 

ignition off and then on again). 

• KeyWord 2000 & CAN - an error message is displayed and communications are 

maintained 

192

Login to an ECM 



1. Ignition on - engine not running 

2. ECM supports login 

3. OmiCheck 

Login Procedure 


2. From 'Systems Menu' select relevant ECM. 

3. From 'Functions Menu' select 'Login ECM'. 


5. On acceptance of the code 'Code accepted' will be displayed, if not an 


NOTE: There is no restriction on the number of attempts made to enter the login code, 

however, some ECMs may break the datalink requiring the ignition to be switched off 

for approximately 2 minutes before re-establishing communications. 

193


BMW 




The vehicle's diagnostic connector (20-pin round connector) is always found in the 

engine compartment. If the vehicle is fitted with a J1962 diagnostic connector, this 

can usually be located in the driver's footwell behind a cover. 

NOTE: If the BMW vehicle under test has both the round (20 pin) diagnostic connector 

and the J1962 (16 pin) connector, the round connector should always be used to 

access information via the BMW application and the J1962 connector should be used 

to access data via the EOBD application (ensure the cap is fitted to the 20-pin 

connector). If the cap is not fitted, the J1962 connector will not function correctly. 

Application Menu 

Select BMW from the Main Menu. From the sub-menu select the required system e.g. 

EMS (Engine Management System), ABS or Airbag etc. 

EMS Sub Menu 

Select the applicable harness from the system menu. The application will 

automatically detect the ECU during which time you will see the Establishing 

Communications Please Wait Message. Once the ECU has been recognised, the 

EMS menu will be displayed. 

Service Reset 

Resets the oil and inspection service lights and Condition Based Service (CBS) 

options. 

Use the on screen instructions to select the reset option required, refer to Service 

section in the manual for more detailed instructions. 

NOTE: The Motronic 1.7/1.71f and 1.7rt fault listing information should be referenced 

when interrogating a Motronic 1.7.2 system. 

Citroen and Peugeot 

Particle Filter (FAP) 

PSA were the first Vehicle manufacturer to introduce the Particle Emissions Filter 

(PEF or FAP). The purpose of the filter is to considerably reduce emissions from 

diesel injected engines. 

As well as the standard functions such as Read/Clear DTCs and Live Data there are 

a number of configuration functions available for the Particle Filter and the Additive 

194


ECU. 

NOTE: Standard functions for the Additive ECU such as Read/Clear DTCs should be 

accessed from the Additive ECU option in the main PSA menu. 

Marque Vehicle Year range 

Citroen C5 2000 - 2005 

Citroen C8 2002 - 2005 

Peugeot 206 2004 - 2005 

Peugeot 307 2001 - 2005 

Peugeot 406 / 406 Coupe 1999 - 2004 

Peugeot 607 1999 - 2005 

Peugeot 807 2002 - 2005 

Common Faults and Operations 

There are two common situations which occur with the Particle Filter. 

Both will cause the Particle Filter Warning Lamp to come on or flash indicating that 

there is a fault with the system. 

Whenever the Warning Lamp comes on or starts flashing It is advisable to enter the 

Additive ECU diagnostic with the OmiCheck and use the Read DTCs function to find 

out why the light is on. It is also advisable to enter the appropriate Engine ECU 

diagnostic with the OmiCheck and perform a Read DTCs operation. DTCs are usually 

stored on both the Additive ECU and the Engine ECU when there is a fault with the 

filter. The descriptions of the DTCs should match. 

1. ‘Minimum Level’ DTC: If the DTC displayed is a ‘Minimum Level’ DTC this 

indicates that the reservoir must be re-filled or topped up. In this case the Filter 

and Additive Reset function should be used (see below). 

2. ‘Filter Clogged’ or ‘Filter Blocked’ DTC: If the DTC displayed is a ‘Filter Clogged’ 

or ‘Filter Blocked’ DTC this indicates that the filter itself has either reached the 

end of its life or is dirty and has not been regenerated recently. In this case the 

technician should perform the Regeneration function using the Engine ECU 

diagnostics on the OmiCheck (see below). If the Regeneration function is not 

successful, or the DTC is still present after a Regeneration, the filter must be 

replaced (using the Filter and/or Additive Reset function below). 

3. In the situation where both ‘Minimum Level’ and ‘Filter Blocked or Clogged’ DTCs 

are present both the filter and the Additive should be replaced. The Filter and 

Additive Reset function should then be carried out (see below). 

195


Regeneration 

Regeneration is managed by the EMS system. Entry to this function must therefore 

be done by selecting EMS and the appropriate system. 

The function of Regeneration is to burn particles which have been caught in the filter 

in order to clean it. This is achieved by raising the temperature inside the filter to 

around 450°C. An additive is used to reduce the natural combustion temperature of 

the particles to around 450°C. 

Under normal driving conditions regeneration takes place automatically, every 400 to 

500 km (250 to 300 miles). However, some driving conditions, such as urban driving, 

are unfavourable to automatic regeneration. In these cases it is necessary to force a 

Regeneration using this function. 

The following is recommended practice for forced Regeneration: 

1. The exhaust and its direct environment MUST be clean. 

2. Exhaust gas extraction devices must NOT be connected to the exhaust pipe. 

3. No-one should go near the exhaust pipe during Regeneration. 

4. The engine must be running and the engine coolant temperature must be above 

70°C for a successful regeneration to take place. 

5. The fuel tank must be at least ¼ full. 

NOTE: The operation proceeds as follows: 

• Start the engine 

• Sending of the command via OmiCheck 

• Wait 2 minutes 

• The ECU increases engine speed to 4000 rpm with post-injection 

• The ECU returns the engine speed to idle for 30 seconds 

• The ECU increases engine speed to 3000 rpm to create a balance. 

The vehicle must be in good condition (oil level/quality, belt tension/quality) or 

damage may occur when the Regeneration function is executed. 

The OmiCheck will guide the technician through the process. 

The technician should perform a Clear DTCs function followed by a Read DTCs 

function after a Regeneration to check the validity of the process. In some cases the 

filter may have been damaged prior to Regeneration. A ‘Filter Blocked’ or ‘Filter 

Clogged’ DTC being present after a Regeneration indicates that the filter has reached 

the end of its life and must be replaced (use the Additive Reset function below for this 

operation). 

NOTE: When the technician is asked to start the engine the OmiCheck may reset 

depending on the state of the vehicle's battery. If this occurs the engine should be 

kept running and the technician should re-start the OmiCheck and re-select the 

196

'Regeneration' option. 

Filter and Additive (Reservoir) Reset 


Entry to the Reset function is done via the Additive ECU option. 

There are two variants of the Additive ECU: 

1. ADDITIF_FAP 

2. ADDGO2 

The OmiCheck should automatically identify which variant is fitted to the vehicle by 

reading the ECU part number. If the part number is unknown to the OmiCheck the 

technician will be asked to select the correct ECU. 

As a rough guide the early FAP systems use ADDITIF_FAP (1999 – 2002) and the 

later FAP systems use ADDGO2 (2002 onwards). 

ADDITIF_FAP (1999 – 2002) 

There is one option in the Reset menu which performs both a reset of the Filter and 

reset of the Additive (reservoir). 

FILTER RESET: 

This function is used whenever the amount of additive in the reservoir falls below the 

pre-determined minimum level. It can also be used when the Particle Filter itself is 

changed (this usually coincides with the re-fill of the reservoir). If the filter does need 

to be changed it should be done prior to carrying out this function and, if applicable, 

prior to carrying out an additive change. There are two types of additives used in 

these systems, DPX42 is the original additive used. A full tank of DPX42 will last for 

50,000 miles. EOLYS176 is a newer additive. A full tank of EOLYS176 will last for 

approximately 75,000 miles. When the additive has reached the minimum level the 

Particle Filter Warning Lamp will start to flash on the dashboard of the vehicle 

informing the driver that the additive must be topped up. A fault code (DTC) is also 

stored on both the Engine ECU and the Additive ECU. 

If the Particle Filter needs to be changed the Particle Filter Warning Lamp will also 

start to flash on the dashboard of the vehicle 

197


A fault code (DTC) is also stored on both the Engine ECU and the Additive ECU, 

usually describing the problem as ‘Filter clogged’ or ‘Filter blocked’. Sometimes 

performing a ‘Regeneration’ (see above) may unclog or unblock the filter. If it does 

not then the filter must be changed. 

This function is designed to be used AFTER the technician has changed the filter and/ 

or topped up the additive reservoir. Additives can be purchased from the 

manufacturer’s parts department. This function resets the 'Quantity of Additive' in the 

Reservoir and Filter' value stored in the Additive CM to zero. The technician must then 

follow the instructions precisely to enable the CM to re-learn the value. 

IMPORTANT: The OmiCheck instructs the technician to perform the following: 

1. Switch ignition OFF. 

2. Remove the diesel filler cap. 

3. Wait for 10 seconds. 

4. Replace the diesel filler cap. 

5. Switch the engine on and run for 1 minute. 

6. Switch the engine off and wait for 4 minutes. 

7. Activate nothing on the vehicle during this time, especially not the key fob! 

8. Switch the ignition ON. 

9. Use the OmiCheck to Clear DTCs in the Additive ECU. 

10. Use the OmiCheck to Clear DTCs in the Engine ECU. 

The sequence of events MUST be started at within 10 seconds of the OmiCheck 

displaying the "To complete reset do the following..." message. If it is not performed 

in the correct order or started within 10 seconds the vehicle will not re-learn the new 

Additive value correctly and the Particle Filter warning lamp will continue to flash or 

stay on. If this occurs the function must be re-selected on the OmiCheck and the 

procedure re-started. 

ADDGO2 (2002 onwards) 

There are two options in the Reset menu: 

RESERVOIR RESET: 

This function is used whenever the amount of additive in the reservoir falls below the 

pre-determined minimum level. There are two types of additive used in these 

systems, DPX42 is the original additive used. A full tank of DPX42 will last for 50,000 

miles. EOLYS176 is a newer additive. A full tank of EOLYS176 will last for 

approximately 75,000 miles. When the additive has reached the minimum level the 

Particle Filter Warning Lamp will start to flash on the dashboard of the vehicle 

informing the driver that the additive must be topped up. A fault code (DTC) is also 

stored on both the Engine ECU and the Additive ECU. 

198


This function is designed to be used AFTER the technician has topped up the additive 

reservoir. Additives can be purchased from the manufacturer’s parts department. This 

function resets the 'Quantity of Additive' in the reservoir value stored in the Additive 

CM to zero. The technician must then follow the instructions precisely to enable the 

CM to re-learn the value. 


















FILTER RESET: 

This function is used when the Particle Filter itself has been changed. If the filter does 

need to be changed it should be done prior to carrying out this function and, if 

applicable, prior to carrying out an additive change. If the Particle Filter does need to 

be changed the Particle Filter Warning Lamp will start to flash on the dashboard of 

the vehicle. A fault code (DTC) is also stored on both the Engine ECU and the 

Additive ECU, usually describing the problem as ‘Filter clogged’ or ‘Filter blocked’. 

Sometimes performing a ‘Regeneration’ (see above) may unclog or unblock the filter. 

If it does not then the filter must be changed. This function is designed to be used 

AFTER the technician has changed the filter. 

This function resets the 'Quantity of Additive in the Filter' value stored in the Additive 

CM to zero. The technician must then follow the instructions precisely to enable the 

CM to re-learn the value. 




199
















WARNING: The additive is harmful and should not come into contact with the 

technician’s skin. 

NOTE: The additive is now sold as a kit which includes a device to insert the additive 

into the reservoir. Some kits contain the additive in a plastic bag which can be placed 

directly into the reservoir. 

Additive Type 

There are two different types of Additive used: 

• DPX42 

• EOLYS176 (DPX10) 

Both have different properties, DPX42 is the original additive used by PSA. A full tank 

of DPX42 lasts 50,000 miles. EOLYS176 (DPX10) is an improved additive which will 

last for 75,000 miles. 

IMPORTANT: A vehicle which uses DPX42 can not be upgraded to EOLYS176 

(DPX10) and vice versa. This function is used when a new Additive ECU is installed 

in a vehicle. The new ECU is programmed with the additive type that the vehicle uses. 

There are two ways to visually determine the type of Additive used. This depends on 

the model. 

For Peugeot 406, Peugeot 607, Peugeot 807, Citroen C5 and Citroen C8: 

Check the colour of the Additive reservoir cap. 

• For EOLYS176 (DPX10) the colour will be Black with a green ring. 

• For DPX42 the colour will be Black with a white ring. 

200


For Peugeot 307 and Peugeot 206: 

Check the colour of the click-on connectors on the Additive reservoir and Particle 

filter. 

• For EOLYS176 (DPX10) the colour will be Black with a green ring. 

• For DPX42 the colour will be Black with a white ring. 

IMPORTANT: 

• Use these two additives exclusively. The use of any other additive will cause the 

system to malfunction. 

• Always use new, clean additive. There is a risk of the additive injector seizing if 

dirty or old additive is used. 

• Never mix the two additives. 

• It is impossible to differentiate visually between the two additives, as their 

appearance is identical. 

WARNING: The additive is harmful and should not come into contact with the 

technician’s skin. 

Control Unit Replacement 

This function refers to the Additive ECU, and must be accessed via the Additive ECU 

option. 

When a new Additive ECU is installed in a vehicle it must be programmed with the 

current quantity of additive in the reservoir. 

Before using this function ensure that: 

1. You know the ‘quantity of additive’ present in the reservoir. You can do this by 

reading the value from the old Additive ECU while it is still installed (using Live 

Data ‘Quantity Of Additive’ reading). If you have already removed the old ECU 

you can obtain the value by selecting the correct EMS system fitted to the vehicle 

and reading the value from Live Data. 

2. The new Additive ECU has been installed. 

The technician will be asked to input the ‘Quantity Of Additive’ value which will then 

be written to the new ECU. 

201


Inter-changeability 

As stated previously it is not possible to upgrade a vehicle which uses additive type 

DPX42 to EOLYS176 (DPX10). 

It is possible however to install an additive ECU with Additive Type mapping DPX42 

or EOLYS176 (DPX10) in order to replace an ECU with mapping DPX42 is possible 

on condition that the following operations are carried out: 

1. Follow the process for ‘Control Unit Replacement’ above. 

2. Use the ‘Additive Type’ menu option to set the additive type to DPX42. 

When installing an additive ECU with Additive Type mapping EOLYS176 (DPX10) in 

order to replace an ECU with mapping EOLYS176 (DPX10) the following operations 

must be carried out: 

1. Follow the process for ‘Control Unit Replacement’ above. 

2. Use the ‘Additive Type’ menu option to set the additive type to EOLYS176.Use 

the ‘Additive Type’ menu option to set the additive type to EOLYS176. 

Reset Adaptions 

The purpose of the Reset Adaptions function is to reset the base values stored in the 

CM's memory to a zero state. These base values vary according to the age of the 

engine and the purpose of them is to maintain a perfectly adjusted engine system. 

After a reset the CM will re-learn the values, either automatically or by the technician 

performing a number of steps. 

The function should be used when important components have been replaced. If the 

base values are not reset the engine will experience stalling and hesitation problems. 

The process for Reset Adaptions varies from CM to CM. The technician may have to 

go through several steps to successfully complete the reset and re-learn procedure. 

On systems which require a diagnostic command the OmiCheck will attempt to guide 

the technician through these steps, but due to battery voltage dips during engine 

cranking the OmiCheck may reset before a procedure has been completed. 

Below is a guide for the technician detailing the procedures for each individual CM. 

202

Bosch EDC16 


This function is used when one of the following parts have been replaced: 

• EGR Valve 

• Butterfly double doser (EGR Butterfly + Intake air Heater Butterfly) assembly 

• Replacement of the engine management CM 

Procedure: 

1. Before carrying out this command the following conditions must be met: 

• Engine off for 10 minutes 

• Engine cold 

2. OmiCheck sends the command to reset. 

Bosch MP7.2 / Bosch MP7.3 

This is a manual procedure. There is no need to plug the OmiCheck in to perform the 

initialisation. 

After the following operations the injection CM loses it's base values: 

• Disconnection or replacement of the CM 

• Disconnection of the battery. 

• Down-loading of the control unit. 

• Re-configuration of the CM 

The base values relate to the following components: 

• Oxygen Sensor 

• Idle Regulation Stepper Motor 

• Throttle Potentiometer 

• Knock Sensor 

Procedure: 

1. Switch off the ignition. 

2. Turn on the ignition for 10 seconds (without starting engine, ignition position II). 

3. Start the engine (if the engine stalls start the operation again). 

4. Carry out a road test of at least 3 miles. 

5. Switch off the ignition. 

6. Switch on the ignition (position II). 

7. Read the fault codes and clear any codes present. 

203


Bosch M7.4.4 

This procedure must be carried out when one of the following components is 

replaced: 

• Injector(s) 

• Fuel Pump 

Procedure: 


2. Switch ignition off for at least 20 seconds. 

3. Start the engine and run at idle until the fans cut-in (Air conditioning must be off). 

Bosch ME7.4.4 / Magneti Marelli 5NP 


replaced: 


• Fuel Pump 

Procedure: 


2. Motorised Throttle Learning. 

• Switch off the ignition 

• Turn on the ignition for at least 10 seconds. Do not press the throttle during 

these 10 seconds. 

3. Accelerator Pedal Position Learning. 

• Press the accelerator pedal fully 

• Switch off the ignition for 20 seconds. Do not release the accelerator pedal 

during these 10 seconds 

204

Bosch ME7.4.6 



replaced. 


• Fuel Pump 

Procedure: 


2. Throttle Learning: 

• Ensure engine coolant temperature is between 5°C and 100°C 

• Ensure Air Temperature is higher than 5°C 

• Do not press the accelerator pedal 

• Switch on the ignition, wait for 30 seconds 

• Switch off the ignition, wait for 30 seconds 

3. Accelerator Pedal Position Learning: 

• Switch on the ignition and press the accelerator down fully 

• Return to the foot-off position 

• Start the engine without accelerating 

4. Engine Mixture Learning: 

• This must be carried out with the engine warm (above 80°C) 

• Undertake an urban drive of 5km 

5. Engine Ageing Learning: 

• Start the engine and run at idle with the engine warm (above 80°C) for at 

least 5 minutes 

Sagem S2000 / Sagem S2000 PM1 / Sirius 81 

Procedure: 

1. Switch the ignition off and on. 


205


Magneti Marelli 48P 

Procedure: 

1. Switch the ignition off and on. 


3. Ensure ignition on and engine stopped. 

4. Ensure accelerator pedal is not pressed. 


6. Press the accelerator pedal fully. 


8. Release the accelerator pedal. 

Magneti Marelli 4MP2 Engine Code RFN (2.0i) 

Procedure: 

IMPORTANT: Do not start the engine for 10 minutes before carrying out this 

operation. 

• The engine coolant temperature must be below 30°C 

• The air conditioning must be set to off 


2. Switch off the ignition to allow the CM to reset. 


4. Switch on the ignition and listen for the EGR Valve clicking. 


6. If the EGR Valve does not click the procedure must be restarted. 

7. Turn the starter motor over in order to turn the engine flywheel. 

8. Switch off the ignition to store the new values. 

9. Wait for 12 minutes while the CM powers down. 

10. Switch on the ignition. 


12. Start the engine. 

13. Run the engine at idle until the fans cut-in (Air conditioning must be off). 

14. Before returning the vehicle to the customer a test drive should be undertaken 

during which time an injection cut-off should be triggered. This is achieved by 

driving the vehicle in 3rd, 4th or 5th gear and sharply releasing the accelerator 

pedal without braking. 

206

Magneti Marelli 4MP2 Engine Code 3FZ (2.2i) 


Procedure: 

1. Switch the ignition off then on. 


3. Switch the ignition off then on again. 





8. Wait for 12 minutes while the CM powers down 


10. Wait for 15 seconds 






Magneti Marelli 6LP Engine Code RFN (2.0i) 

Procedure: 


operation. 


• The air conditioning must be set to off 


2. Switch off the ignition to allow the CM to reset. 


4. Switch on the ignition and listen for the EGR Valve clicking. 


6. If the EGR Valve does not click the procedure must be restarted. 







207






Magneti Marelli 6LP Engine Codes KFU / RFK / 3FZ 

Procedure: 


operation 


• The air conditioning must be set to 

1. Switch the ignition off then on. 


3. Switch the ignition off then on again. 







10. Wait for 15 seconds 






208

Injector Programming 


This function is available on the Bosch EDC15C7 Diesel Injection system fitted to the 

following vehicles: 

Marque Model Engine Size Engine Code 

Citroen Relay/Jumper 2.0D RHV 

Citroen Relay/Jumper 2.2D 4HY 

Citroen Relay/Jumper 2.8D 8140.63 

Citroen Relay/Jumper 2.8D 8140.43S 

Peugeot Boxer 2.0D RHV 

Peugeot Boxer 2.2D 4HY 

Peugeot Boxer 2.8D 8140.43S 

The purpose of this function is to enable the technician to replace a faulty injector, or 

injectors, and program in the value of the new injector to the Diesel Control Unit. 

It may also be used when a new Control Unit has been installed and the technician is 

required to program it with the values of the injectors fitted. 

This method gives each injector a classification of 1, 2 or 3. The classification relates 

to the operating conditions of the injector. The control unit stores the classification of 

the injectors fitted and adjusts the treatment of each injector depending on the 

classification. The purpose of this is to improve performance and emissions. 

The values stored in the control unit and the values of the new injector(s) must match. 

If they do not the DTC P1301 will be present on the control unit and the MIL will flash. 

On this system the classification of each injector should always be the same. For 

example they could all be classification 2 or they could all be classification 3, but if 

Injector 1 is classification 2 and Injector 2 is classification 3 this will cause a DTC to 

be stored and the MIL to flash. 

209


Fiat, Alfa and Lancia 

Reset Adaptions 

The purpose of the Reset Adaptions function is to reset the base values stored in the 

CM's memory to the factory default state. These base values vary according to the 

age of the engine and the purpose of them is to maintain a perfectly adjusted engine 

system. After a reset the CM will re-learn the values automatically. 

The function should be used when important components have been replaced. If the 

base values are not reset the engine will experience stalling and hesitation problems. 

The technician will be guided through the process by the OmiCheck. 

Particle Filter Functions 

NOTE: For vehicles which are PSA based (see list below) please refer to the Particle 

Filter (FAP) section under Peugeot and Citroen: 

Marque Model MY 

Fiat Ulysse '02 2002 - 2005 

Fiat Ulysse '02 2002 - 2005 

Fiat Ulysse '05 2005 - 

Fiat Ulysse '05 2005 - 

Lancia Phedra 2002 - 2005 

Lancia Phedra '05 2005 - 

Lancia Phedra '05 2005 - 

These functions relate to Fiat / Alfa / Lancia Particle Filter which went into production 

in 2005. 

210


The functions are used on the Engine Management systems Bosch EDC16C39 CF4 

EOBD and Magneti Marelli 6F3 EOBD, fitted to the following vehicles: 

Marque Model Engine Size 

Fiat Doblo 1.3 JTD 

Fiat Idea 1.3 JTD 

Fiat Palio RST 1.3 JTD 

Fiat Panda 03 1.3 JTD 

Alfa Romeo 159 1.9 MJET 16V 

Alfa Romeo 159 1.9 MJET 8V 

Alfa Romeo 159 2.4 MJET 

Fiat Croma ‘05 1.9 MJET 16V 

Fiat Croma ‘05 1.9 MJET 8V 

Fiat Croma ‘05 MJET 20V 

NOTE: Some early builds of these vehicles may not have a Particle Filter fitted. The 

OmiCheck will automatically identify whether a Particle Filter is not present and omit 

these functions from the function menu. 

Filter Regeneration 

The function of regeneration is to burn particles which have been caught in the filter 

in order to clean it. This is achieved by raising the temperature inside the filter to 

around 450°C. An additive is used to reduce the natural combustion temperature of 

the particles to around 450°C. 

Under normal driving conditions regeneration takes place automatically, every 400 to 

500 km (250 to 300 miles). However, some driving conditions, such as urban driving, 

are unfavourable to automatic regeneration. In these cases it is necessary to force a 

regeneration using this function. 

When a forced regeneration is required the Particle Filter Warning Lamp will be 

illuminated. 

On some occasions the filter may also become clogged. When this occurs the engine 

management ECU will store a fault code (DTC) of P1206 or P2002. Performing a 

regeneration will rectify this (the ECU’s fault memory is automatically erased during 

the process). 

The following is recommended practice for forced regeneration: 

1. The exhaust and its direct environment MUST be clean. 

2. Exhaust gas extraction devices must NOT be connected to the exhaust pipe. 

3. No-one should go near the exhaust pipe during regeneration. 

211


4. The engine must be running and the engine coolant temperature must be above 

70°C for a successful regeneration to take place. 

5. The fuel tank must be at least ¼ full. 



depending on the state of vehicle’s battery. If this occurs the engine should be kept 

running and the technician should re-start the OmiCheck and re-select the 

‘Regeneration’ option. 

Filter Replacement 

This procedure must be performed AFTER the particle filter has been replaced. 

Parameters stored in the ECU relating to the condition and lifetime of the particle filter, 

are reset by this function. 

After initialising the parameters in the ECU the regeneration process detailed above 

is performed. For this reason all of the recommended practice points in the above 

section are also applicable to this function. 



depending on the state of vehicle’s battery. If this occurs the engine should be kept 

running and the technician should re-start the OmiCheck and re-select the 

‘Regeneration’ option. 

Oil Change 

This procedure must be performed AFTER an engine oil change has taken place. 

Parameters stored in the ECU relating to the condition and lifetime of the Oil, are reset 

by this function. 


Pre-catalyser Replacement 

This procedure must be performed AFTER the pre-catalyser has been replaced. 

Parameters stored in the ECU relating to the condition and ageing of the 

pre-catalyser, are reset by this function. 


Differential Pressure Sensor Replacement 

This procedure must be performed AFTER the differential pressure sensor has been 

replaced. Parameters stored in the ECU relating to the pressure difference are reset 

by this function. 


212







The function is available on all Diesel Engine Management Systems from 2002 

onwards. 

There are two different methods for Injector Programming on FAL: 

The early method gives each injector a classification of 1, 2 or 3. The classification 

relates to the operating conditions of the injector. The control unit stores the 

classification of the injectors fitted and adjusts the treatment of each injector 

depending on the classification. The purpose of this is to improve performance and 

emissions. The OmiCheck has the ability to read out the current classification of the 

injectors and program in the new classification. 

The newer method uses 9 digit alpha-numeric injector codes. These codes are 

stamped on the casing of each individual injector and held electronically in the control 

unit. The code is a result of calibration results and the results of tests ran on the 

injector at the time of production. This is an enhancement of the above method 

designed to combine the injector's structural characteristics with the control module's 

software and improve performance and emissions to a greater extent. This method is 

used on the remaining diesel systems. The OmiCheck has the ability to read out the 

current injector codes and program in new injector codes. 

In both cases the values stored in the control unit and the values of the new injector(s) 

must match. If they do not the DTC P1301 will be present on the control unit and the 

MIL will flash. 

NOTE: On Bosch EDC15 CF3 (2.0 / 2.3 / 2.8) systems, fitted to the Fiat Ducato, the 

classification of all injectors should always be the same. For example they could all 

be classification 2 or they could all be classification 3, but if Injector 1 is classification 

2 and Injector 2 is classification 3 this will cause a DTC to be stored and the MIL to 

flash. 

The function is still invaluable because when a new injector is fitted (or a control unit 

replaced) the control unit must be programmed, via this function, with the injector 

class 2 value. 

Service Reset Alfa Romeo Vehicles (UK only) 

For Alfa Romeo vehicles with the Mannesman Dashboard (147 and GT) there is a 

problem with the Dashboard which causes the ‘Number of miles to Service’ value to 

be set to zero when a Service Reset is performed using the OmiCheck. 

213


When the Service Reset is performed the Dashboard stores the current mileage (or 

kilometre) value, read from the Odometer, in order to calculate when the next service 

is required. 

However, when the Odometer is shown in miles the calculation for the distance to the 

next service fails. This results in distance to the next service being displayed as zero 

and the Service Reset fails to be completed. 

To reset the Service Interval the following procedure must be performed: 



menu. 



4. Use the [MODE], [+] and [-] buttons to set the units to Kilometres. All other 




6. Plug the OmiCheck into the Diagnostic Socket (using the 16-pin FAL LS CAN 

harness) and perform a Service Reset by selecting Service, Alfa Romeo, 

Mannesman then Service Reset. 

7. Disconnect the OmiCheck, leaving the ignition on. 


menu. 



10. Use the [MODE], [+] and [-] buttons to set the units back to Miles. All other 



and press [MODE] to select. 

12. ‘Number of Miles to Service’ should now read approximately 12500 miles. 




This procedure is necessary to ensure that the value read from the Odometer by the 

dashboard, when a Service Reset is performed by the OmiCheck, is in Kilometres. 

The Dashboard can then calculate the ‘Number of Miles to Service’ correctly. 

On the European Continent this procedure is not necessary as all dashboards are in 

Kilometres. 

214

Ford 


Introduction 

This application enables the diagnosis of all Ford control modules fitted to modern 

vehicles, including Engine, ABS/ESP, Airbag, Body Control, Climate Control, 

Instruments, TPMS, Power Steering, Transmission, Cruise Control, PATS, Seats, 

Doors, Mirrors, etc. 

For the engine this includes full functionality for modern systems such as EEC IV and 

EEC V. As well as slow (blink) codes from early EEC IV systems (both 2-digit and 

3-digit blink codes are supported). 

System Selection 

Due to the expanded list of supported systems, the Ford main menu is split into 

sub-sections: 

1. Powertrain (Engine, Transmission, Injector Control, Fuel Additive…). 

2. Chassis (ABS/ESP, Parking Brake, TPMS, PAS, Steering Angle Sensor, Cruise 

Control, 4x4…). 

3. Body (Airbag, Climate, Instruments, Body Control, PATS, Lights, Doors, Seats, 

Mirrors, Parking Aid, Tailgate…). 

4. Infotainment (Audio, Radio, CD Player, NAV, Display…). 

System Search 

The system search function allows the OmiCheck to interrogate all possible fitted 

control modules fitted to a vehicle. Once the system search has been completed then 

a menu of available systems will be displayed. The operator can then select the 

required system for further diagnosis. 

There are now two options under System Search: 

1. Quick Search. This option will interrogate the core control modules only (Engine, 

ABS/ESP, Airbag, Climate Control, Body Control, Instruments, Parking Brake 

etc.). 

2. Full Search. This option will interrogate ALL Control Modules (as the OmiCheck 

now supports, and therefore searches for, every Ford control module this may 

take several minutes to complete). 

NOTE: All module names are displayed as acronyms and the key can be used to 

show the help text when a menu is being displayed. 

General Diagnostics 

All of the generic systems have the options to read and clear DTCs, display Electronic 

Control Module (ECM) data and perform a self test if available. 

215


Self Test 

The purpose of the self test is for the control module to run an internal test that will 

check the module inputs and outputs for fault conditions. The module will activate 

outputs and monitor inputs to determine faults such as open/short circuits etc. The 

self test should have been completed within a maximum of 30 seconds. After the 

completion of the self test then all of the control modules outputs are returned to their 

initial state. 

NOTE: Some control modules will require certain conditions to be met for the test to 

be successfully passed. Generally all switches should remain off. 

GEM (General Electric Module) - All doors should be open, bonnet and boot closed. 

Rear wash wiper set to intermittent. Press and hold the hazard warning light switch. 

HEC (Hybrid Electronic Cluster) - Sports / Economy switch cycled if fitted. 

NOTE: If the self test indicates a result code then this may be due to the conditions 

for the test not being correct and not the control module. 

Engine Management Guide 

If there is doubt as to which engine management system is fitted to the vehicle under 

test but the vehicle has a J1962 connector (16-pin), examine the connector. If pins 2 

and 10 are fitted, the vehicle is EEC V but if pins 3 and 11 are fitted, the vehicle is 

EEC IV - DCL. 

NOTE: The Ford Galaxy 1.9 TDi with a VW engine is only accessible via the VAG 

application. 

The OmiCheck will attempt to establish serial communications with the vehicle. Once 

established, follow the on-screen instructions for each test. 

NOTE: If the ECU detects a fault then the live data may be set to a default value. 

Check the fault codes and rectify any problems before using the live data values. 

Selection of Diagnostic System 

Ford traditionally used EECIV (Electronic Engine Control, version 4) on all their 

vehicles from the early 1980s until the mid 1990s. The Ford diagnostic unit at this time 

was called a STAR tester, (Self Test Automatic Read-out). It only showed either a 2 

or 3 digit code, which the technician looked up in a table to get the description. No live 

data or component tests were available. 

Around 1994, Ford introduced a more advanced system called EECV (Electronic 

Engine Control, version 5). This system was only fitted to some vehicles. Ford then 

merged the two systems, which was known by various names. Amongst these are 

EECIV1/2, EECIV enhanced and DCL (Data Communications Link). For these 

systems Ford use the WDS (World Diagnostic System) diagnostic tool, these systems 

show live data and have limited component tests. 

216


By 1998 all Ford vehicles had changed to the EECV system, except: 

• Those vehicles made in collaboration with the Japanese i.e. Maverick, Probe etc. 

which use Japanese engine management systems. 

• The diesel Ford Galaxy which has a VW engine and uses the Bosch EDC system. 

• Transit 94 models which use the Lucas EPIC system. 

EEC V Menu 

Select the type of engine fitted to the vehicle then follow the on-screen instructions: 

For a diesel vehicle, the type of engine can usually be found on the plastic engine 

cover. To use a petrol variant the Petrol option should be selected. 

If the Petrol option has been selected the following options will be provided: 

1. Read DTCs 

2. Clear DTCs 

3. Live Data 1 

4. Live Data 2 

5. Freeze Data 

6. Continuous Tests 

7. Output Test 

8. KOEO Test 

9. KOER Test 

10. Read VIN 

For help on freeze data and continuous tests, refer to the EOBD section of this 

document. 

Output Test - Circuit Tests 

The ignition must be on and the engine off. "Test in Progress" will be displayed. The 

test will automatically exit after 20 seconds for safety. 

KO EO Test - Key On/Engine Off Self Test 

This test is programmed into the ECU. It is to be carried out with the ignition on but 

engine off. Switch off all ancillary items e.g. Heaters, Aircon etc. "Performing test 

Please wait" will be displayed whilst the test is being performed. After the test has 

been completed the test results will be requested and the fault codes displayed. 

217


KO ER Test - Key On/Engine Running Self Test 

This test is similar to the KO EO test but with the engine running. Ensure the engine 

is at the correct operating temperature and follow the instructions on the display 

otherwise incorrect DTCs will be reported. 

NOTE: For both KO EO and KO ER, the test results reported do not necessarily 

indicate a faulty component or system. Some fault codes reported may be for 

components or systems not fitted to the vehicle. A fault may also be reported if the 

test was performed with the system in an incorrect state (i.e. Power steering not 

operated during the test when requested or the Aircon turned on). All peripheral items 

should be turned off at the start of the test, e.g. heaters fans and Aircon. 

Read VIN - Read the Vehicle Identification Number stored in the ECU 

This will attempt to read the VIN from the ECU if it is supported/available. 

Injector Programming (TDCi Engines) 

This function is required by service centres when an Injector needs to be replaced, or 

there is a driveability problem. 

For 1.8 TDCi and 2.0 TDCi engines the each injector has a 16-digit calibration code 

stamped on the body. 

For 1.6 TDCi engines the each injector has an 8-digit calibration code stamped on the 

body. 

These codes relate to the electrical and structural characteristics of each injector, 

which are defined during production. The PCM must know the calibration codes for 

each injector in order to treat and operate the injectors in the correct manner. This 

helps to reduce emissions and improve performance. The code must be programmed 

in by communicating and downloading the code into the PCMs memory. 

There are three common situations which demand this function. 

1. After Injector replacement. 

2. Fuel injection system ‘calibration’. 

3. To cure drivability problems. Lack of power, black smoke and the presence of 

DTCs P2336, P2337, P2338 can often be fixed by re-entering the existing 4 

injector codes. 

218

Injector Programming is used on the following vehicles: 

NOTE: 


Model Engine MY 

Fiesta 1.6 TDCi 2004 - 

Focus 1.8 TDCi 2001 - 2005 

Focus (new shape) 1.6 TDCi 2005 - 

Focus C-Max 1.6 TDCi 2005 - 

Mondeo 2.0 TDCi 2000 - 2006 

Mondeo 2.2 TDCi 2005 - 2006 

Transit 2.0 TDCi 2000 - 2005 

Transit 2.4 TDCi 2000 - 2005 

Transit Connect 1.8 TDCi 2002 - 2006 

• On earlier model years (approx pre-2003) it is not possible to read the actual 

injector codes. On these vehicles you will see ’00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00’ or ‘FF FF 

FF FF FF FF FF FF’ or a mixture. 

• After entering an injector code the fuel system will initially run without any pilot 

injection sequence. The car must be driven for a few miles to correct this. 

The codes of the ORIGINAL injectors fitted to vehicle can be found on a label, which 

is fitted to the side of the engine or on the engine rocker top (if it has not yet been 

removed). 

219


OM1349 

OM1350 

1.6 TDCi Engines: - Injector label arrowed in illustration 

Injector codes arrowed in illustration 

220

The codes on the label are in the following format: 

(1&2) X1111111122222222X 

(3&4) X3333333344444444X 


Where: 

11111111 is the code for injector 1, 



44444444 is the code for injector 4. 

NOTE: The injectors are in the physical order, NOT firing order. 

OM1356 

TRANSMISSION 

INJ: 

View from front of vehicle. 

Injector codes can be also be read from the injectors fitted as the codes are stamped 

on a ring attached to the head of the injector, underneath the connector. 

221


OM1352 

1.8 TDCi Engines: - Injector label arrowed in illustration - Side view 

OM1351 

Injector label & Injector head arrowed in illustration - Front view 

222


Injector label - gives four 16 digit numbers 

NOTE: The injectors on the label are in physical order, NOT firing order. 

OM1357 

INJ: 

OM1353 

View from front of vehicle. 

Injector codes can be also be read from the injectors fitted as the codes are stamped 

on a ring attached to the head of the injector, underneath the connector. 

223 

TRANSMISSION


OM1354 

2.0 TDCi Engines: - Injector label arrowed in illustration - Side view 

224

OM1355 


Injector label - gives four 16 digit numbers 

NOTE: The injectors on the label are in firing order, NOT physical order. The top left 

code is Injector 1 (Cyl.1), the top right code is Injector 2 (Cyl.3), the bottom left is 

Injector 3 (Cyl.4) and the bottom right is Injector 4 (Cyl.2). Where Injector is the firing 

number, Cylinder is the physical number. 

When replacing an Injector the code stamped on the body of the new Injector must 

be programmed into the PCM, NOT the code on the label. 

WARNING: Before attempting Injector Programming it is necessary for the 

vehicle to be left stationary with the Engine off for at least 8 hours. This is to 

ensure that the engine is stone cold before Injector Programming is performed. 

Failure to follow these instructions may result in failure of the Injector 

Programming function and/or driveability problems. 

EEC IV Menu 

This application functions in a similar way to the Ford EEC V application although the 

range of tests available is reduced. 

225


Live Data 

Live data is read from the ECU and displayed. Pressing the 'tick' button will print a 

snapshot of live data on the printer. Some of the parameters displayed may not be 

suitable to some systems. e.g. the park/neutral switch. 

Cont. Codes - Continuous Codes 

This displays the DTCs (fault codes) stored during a normal drive cycle. 

Clear Codes 

Clears the DTCs displayed in the Continuous Code test above. Some faults may only 

be stored in the memory under driving conditions and will not be stored after the 'Clear 

Continuous Codes' function. Performing the KO EO and KO ER tests will clear the 

memory hence 'Continuous Codes' should be read before either KO EO or KO ER is 

run. 


This self-test operates as in the case of EEC V. 


This test is similar to the KO EO test but with the engine running. Ensure the engine 

is at the correct operating temperature and follow the instructions on the display 

otherwise incorrect DTCs will be reported. 

After the engine has been started allow the check lights to clear and normal idle to be 

established. 

'Performing Test' will be displayed as the controller runs the test. Engine speed will 

rise to mark the start of the test. The operator should then promptly: 

1. Turn the steering wheel full lock from left to right. 

• Code 521 is displayed if the action is not preformed. 

2. Press and release brake pedal to operate the brake switch. 


3. Toggle O/D switch if fitted. 


4. When the engine returns to idle wait 10 - 15 seconds then blip the throttle to 

exceed 4000 rpm. 


• Code 411 or 412 is displayed if the action is preformed at the wrong part of 

the test. 

If there is a fault present at the start then Code 998 is displayed along with the normal 

fault code and the self-test will not be performed. 

226

Blink Codes Instructions 


Select either 2-digit or 3-digit slow code reader from the menu according to the type 

listed in the application list for the vehicle under test. 

While the application is reading, the tester emits sounds. 

The tick sound indicates that the application is running and functioning and the beep 

sounds when a code is being received from the system under test. 

There is no live data facility available with slow code systems. 

Turning the ignition off and on resets the system for the next test so the user is 

required to follow the OmiCheck instructions in order to determine when these 

operations should be performed. 

NOTES: 

• Fault codes reported by this application do not necessarily indicate a faulty 

component or system, Some fault codes may be for components or systems not 

fitted to the vehicle. 

• A fault may also be reported if the test has not been performed correctly. 

• A fault for a component may indicate a fault wiring circuit. The wiring to the 

component must be completely checked before components are changed. 

• All peripheral items must be switched off at the start of the test e.g. heater fans and 

air conditioning. 

Printing the Results (OmiCheck only) 

Each test prompts the user when printing is available. Refer to the printer instruction 

for connection to the OmiCheck. 

• A header is printed when the application is requested to print for the first time 

during a test. It is recommended that the printout is not removed until all tests have 

been performed as there will not be a header output for further tests until the 

OmiCheck is reset. 

3-Digit Systems 

All the tests are routines performed by the vehicle with either the engine running or 

with the ignition only on. Therefore to get clear codes, actuator tests or wiggle tests, 

the application initiates the KO EO or KO ER tests. 

Fault codes are output during the KO EO and KO ER test. 

There are two types of fault output by the vehicle. The first are current faults that are 

present at the time of test and KAM (Keep Alive Memory) which are faults recorded 

in the memory and may be present or have occurred and are now absent. 

227


A feature of these systems is that fault codes are transmitted twice, so although the 

repeated codes will appear on the screen, the final code listing will only display the 

faults once. 

During the test, the OmiCheck application will instruct the user to perform actions. For 

instance, Turn the steering wheel or Press the throttle. These actions not only allow 

the system to test the switches but also indicate to the vehicle to progress through the 

test. If these actions are not followed, the test result output indicates that the test was 

not performed correctly. The user should make a judgement as to whether this is 

correct or that a switch is faulty. 


KO EO test runs the complete set of functions: 

1. Read present fault codes. This function will take a while but an indication of 

progress should occur within one minute. If there is no response, assume 

communication problems and check the connection and that the ignition is turned 

on as and when instructed. 

2. Read KAM fault codes. This operates in the same way as reading present fault 

codes as described above. 

3. Actuator (circuit) tests. While Actuator test is displayed, pressing the throttle will 

cause actuators and relays to be turned on and off in line with the throttle switch. 

Listening and feeling the relays enables the user to determine the function of 

these circuits. 

4. Wiggle test. This routine functions in the same way as the wiggle test listed 

below. 


KO ER test requires that the engine is at normal operating temperature (above 80°C). 

A good indication of this is when the cooling fan switches on for the first time. 

The testing is performed in the same manner as the KO EO test with the exception 

that there is no Actuator test available. There may be more user operations to perform 

so it is recommended that the OmiCheck screen be watched carefully. 

Wiggle Test 

Wiggle test is used to look for open-circuit wiring faults between sensors and the 

engine controller. The controller responds quite slowly to this test so slow movements 

of the wiring should be undertaken to generate a wiggle test fault. 

Practice the wiggle test by removing and replacing a connector like the throttle 

potentiometer and watching the OmiCheck display for the change of state. 

Some sensors can only be detected in the KO EO condition while others only in the 

KO ER mode. 

228


The application will initiate the fault reading process then when codes start, will 

activate the wiggle test. Wait while this occurs. 

Clear Fault Codes 

Do not perform this operation until after the KO EO and KO ER tests have been 

performed, as this function will delete any stored codes. 

The application will initiate the fault reading process then when codes start, will 

activate the clear code routine. Wait whilst this occurs. 

2 - Digit Systems with KAM 

There are two sets of fault codes in relation to this system. Care should be taken in 

selecting the correct vehicle from the application list where the appropriate table of 

faults is indicated before selecting the OmiCheck menu. 

Enhanced EEC IV systems operate in a similar manner to 3-digit codes with active 

fault codes. KAM fault codes wiggle test, KO EO and KO ER. There are no circuit 

tests available. 

For best results, follow the tests in order: KO EO, continuous test then the KO ER test. 

Vehicles fitted with 2.4i and 2.9i engines do not have the KAM feature. 


The vehicle is required to be at normal operating temperature before this vehicle 

self-test routine will start. The vehicle will wait until the engine is warm. 

Active followed by KAM faults will be output when the dynamic test starts. The user 

may be requested to press the throttle to greater than 4000rpm. This should be done 

promptly otherwise a fault will be reported. It may take up to ten minutes before the 

codes are output or the throttle request appears. 

The self-test routine then enters the service adjust routine. If a fault has been 

reported, the vehicle may not enter into this mode. Do not wait longer than ten 

minutes for the service mode to start. 

Service mode allows the user to adjust idle speed and check timing values. The 

vehicle allows approximately ten minutes for this operation before the test ends. 

If the time allowed is inadequate, the KO ER test will need to be restarted from the 

beginning. Do not adjust the system after service mode has finished. 

System Idle Speed Timing Check Value 

1.1, 1.4, 2.0 CFi 1200 + 50 rpm 10 BTDC 

1.6 EFi 900 + 50 rpm 10 BTDC 

2.0 DOHC EFi 875 + 75 rpm N/A 

229


Clear Fault Codes 

Active fault codes are cleared when the problem is repaired. KAM faults are 

automatically cleared as a consequence of reading the fault code. Therefore it is 

important that the faults are recorded during the test. 

Disconnecting the vehicle battery will also erase any codes stored. This may result in 

surging engine speed, lumpy idle, hesitancy and poor driveability. When the battery 

is reconnected: 

• Allow engine to idle for three minutes. 

• Wait until the engine reaches normal operating temperature. 

• Raise the engine speed to 1200 rpm and hold for two minutes. 

• Drive the vehicle for five miles under a variety of road and traffic conditions. 

2- Digit Systems Without KAM (2.8i & 2.0i) and IAW Systems 

Active fault codes only are available on this system. Any faults are cleared when the 

ignition is switched off. Before reading fault codes, allow the vehicle some time to 

determine whether any faults are present for both ignition on, engine off and with 

engine running. 

The user will be asked to crank the engine if the engine will not start. This is for the 

system to test the vehicle components. 

EPIC 

This system operates as in the case of EEC V. 

230

GM Opel/Vauxhall 


Application Menu 

Select ‘GM Opel/Vauxhall’ from the Main Menu. 

From the sub-menu select the required system e.g. EMS (Engine Management 

System), ABS or Airbag etc. or CAN System Search. 

CAN System Search 

The first option in the menu is ’CAN System Search’. The function is applicable to the 

following vehicles: 

GM Opel/Vauxhall - Astra H 

GM Opel/Vauxhall - Corsa D 

GM Opel/Vauxhall - Signum 

GM Opel/Vauxhall - Vectra C 

GM Opel/Vauxhall - Zafira B 

The OmiCheck will communicate with the vehicle’s Instrument Pack to determine the 

vehicle model. If the vehicle model is unknown the operator will be asked to select the 

vehicle model. 

This function allows the Read DTCs and Clear DTCs on all Control Modules fitted to 

the above vehicles. 

Read DTCs 

The OmiCheck will automatically communicate with all Control Modules. A list of 

Control Modules found and the number of DTCs stored on each will be displayed. 

The operator can then select a Control Module and view and print the DTCs stored. 

Clear DTCs 

The OmiCheck gives the option to Clear DTCs from ALL Control Modules fitted to the 

vehicle (Clear All DTCs), or to Clear DTCs from each individual Control Module 

separately (Clear DTCs by ECU). 

When ‘Clear all DTCs’ is selected the OmiCheck will communicate with ALL Control 

Modules fitted to the vehicle and send a Clear DTCs command. The OmiCheck will 

then read all DTCs from all Control Modules and display a list of the results. 

When ‘Clear DTCs by ECU’ is selected the OmiCheck will automatically communicate 

with all Control Modules and produce a list of Control Modules found and the number 

of DTCs stored. 

The operator can then select a Control Module and Clear the DTCs from that Control 

Module. The operator can then update the list of DTCs by prompting the OmiCheck 

231


to re-read all DTCs or go back to the original list and select another Control Module 

to clear. 

System Selection 

Alternatively the operator can manually select individual systems from the main menu 

(e.g. Body Control Module or Power Steering). 

Read DTCs and Clear DTCs can then be performed on the selected Control Module. 

Engine Management Systems (Only) 

If the vehicle under test was manufactured after 1998 the ‘Auto Search 1998>’ option 

should be used. This option prompts the OmiCheck to automatically identity the 

Engine Control Module. 

If the vehicle under test was manufactured before 1999, or the operator knows the 

Engine Code of the vehicle or the name of the Engine Control Module, the ‘Engine 

Size/Code’ or the ‘Control Unit’ option should be used. These options should also be 

used in the rare cases where the Auto Search option cannot identify the Engine 

Control Module on post -1998 vehicles. 

232

Honda 


EMS 

Scroll through the menu and select the type of control unit fitted to the vehicle and 

follow the on-screen instructions. 

Read Faults 

Follow instruction on screen to obtain fault numbers, select fault codes from menu, 

select relevant fault numbers to display fault text. 

Clear Faults 

Follow instructions on screen to clear fault codes from engine management system. 

ABS 

Read Faults 

Bosch 5.0 

The fault codes can be retrieved from this system by bridging pins 2 & 5 on the 5-pin 

diagnostic connector. This uses the same blink codes pattern as the EMS system 

detailed above. 

Honda ABS 

The fault codes can be retrieved from the system by ignoring the ABS diagnostic 

connector and bridging the two pins of the 2-pin EMS data link connector. 

Honda ALB 

The fault codes can be retrieved from the system by ignoring the ABS diagnostic 

connector and bridging the two pins of the 2-pin EMS data link connector. 

Clear Faults 

Bosch 5.0 

To clear the codes turn ignition off, then switch ignition ON and repeat process 20 

times. 

Honda ABS 

To clear codes turn ignition off, bridge data link terminals of 2-pin connector. Press 

and hold brake pedal, with pedal depressed turn ignition ON. Wait until warning lamp 

illuminates then press and hold brake pedal. Wait again with pedal depressed until 

warning lamp extinguishes then release pedal. Wait 5 seconds, warning lamp flashes 

twice. Trouble codes should now be erased. 

233


Honda ALB 

To clear codes turn ignition OFF, remove ABS (15A) fuse from under bonnet fuse box 

for a minimum of 3 seconds. Refit fuse. 

Airbag 

The coverage of the three systems is detailed below. All use the same comms as the 

EMS systems as detailed previously in this document. 

Type A 

Type B 

Type C 

Vehicle Years 

Accord / Shuttle 1995-2000 

Aerodeck 1996-1997 

Civic 1996-2000 

Coupe 1996-1999 

CRX 1996-1997 

Integra type R 1998-2000 

Prelude / CR-V / HR-V 1994 -2000 

S2000 1999-2000 

Vehicle Years 

Accord 1993-1994 

Civic 1992-1994 

CRX 1995 

Prelude 1992-1996 

Vehicle Years 

Accord Coupe 1995 

Aerodeck 1995 

Civic 1994-1995 

Shuttle 1995 

234

Read Faults 


TYPE A: Ensure ignition has been turned OFF for 10 seconds or longer, bridge 2-pin 

data link connector terminals. Turn ignition ON, 

Type B: Faults on this system can only be read from the SRS (Supplementary 

Restraint Systems) warning lamp which is situated on the left hand side of the 

steering wheel under a cover. 

TYPE C: Ensure ignition is turned OFF, bridge 2-pin data link connector terminals. 

Turn ignition On. 

Clear Faults 

TYPE A: Ensure ignition is turned off, bridge memory erase connector (2-pin) which 

is located to the right of the steering column under the facia panel) Turn ignition ON, 

SRS warning lamp illuminates for 6 seconds. Disconnect bridge wire within 4 seconds 

of SRS warning lamp extinguishing. SRS lamp illuminates, bridge connector 

terminals within 4 seconds of warning lamp illuminating. SRS lamp extinguishes. 

Disconnect bridge wire within 4 seconds of warning lamp extinguishing. SRS warning 

lamp flashes twice. Switch ignition OFF - trouble code should be cleared. 

TYPE B: Switching OFF ignition clears fault codes. 

TYPE C: Ensure ignition is turned off, bridge memory erase connector (2-pin), which 

is located to the right of the steering column under the facia panel. Turn ignition ON, 

SRS warning lamp illuminates for 6 seconds. Disconnect bridge wire within 4 seconds 

of SRS warning lamp extinguishing. SRS lamp illuminates, bridge connector 

terminals within 4 seconds of warning lamp illuminating. SRS lamp extinguishes. 

Disconnect bridge wire within 4 seconds of warning lamp extinguishing. SRS warning 

lamp flashes twice. Switch ignition OFF - Wait a few seconds. Turn ignition ON SRS 

warning lamp illuminates for 6 seconds. Check that SRS warning lamp does not 

illuminate after 30 seconds. Turn ignition OFF. 

Transmission 

Vehicle Years 

Civic 1991-2000 

Accord 1993-1998 

Read Faults 

Fault codes for either vehicle can be accessed via the 2 pin data link connector by 

bridging the terminals on the 2 pin data link connector and turning the ignition on. 

235


Clear Faults 

To clear codes, follow this procedure: 

• Switch ignition off. 

• Remove bridge wire. 

• Remove back up (radio) fuse (7.5A) from under bonnet fusebox for 10 seconds. 

• Refit fuse. 

NOTE: Disconnecting this fuse will erase any memory from in-car entertainment or 

electronic clocks. 

236

Land Rover 

Control Module ID 

Selecting this option displays the module version information. 

Maintenance 


Selecting 'Maintenance' allows the resetting of the adaptations to factory settings for 

the components listed in the menu. It is recommended that the adaptations be reset 

to factory settings as opposed to the `learned' settings once the components have 

been replaced. 

Learn Security 

This option allows the control module to learn a new security value input by the user. 

Tune 

Ensure all electrical loads are off, select 'Tune' and follow the instructions on the 

OmiCheck. The OmiCheck will now take you through the tune. 

Programming 

This option prompts for a vehicle type to be selected then offers a programming menu 

for that type of vehicle. The programming option allows a new ABS ECU to be set up 

on that vehicle. 

Immobilisation 

Follow the on-screen instructions to perform a security check and if security is 

supported, program the alarm immobilisation. 

Bleeding 

Selecting this option allows brake bleeding on the vehicle, full on-screen instructions 

are provided. 

Firstly, a modulator bleed is performed in the order: Left Front, Right Front, Right 

Rear, Left Rear. The operator is instructed to press and hold the brake pedal 

throughout the modulator bleeding procedure. The procedure can be repeated as 

many times as required. Upon completion, the operator is instructed to release the 

brake pedal. 

Secondly, a power bleed is performed in the order Left Front, Right Front, Right Rear, 

Left Rear. The operator can start and stop the pump using the up and down arrows 

with the OmiCheck as instructed. Use the tick key to move on to the next wheel. Once 

completed, an instruction will appear informing the operator that the procedure is 

complete. 

237


Transmitters/Key Programmers 

This option allows the user to program/re-program remote keys/fobs for use with the 

vehicle security/central locking. 

Synchronise ECU 

This option allows the user to setup a new/replacement ECU with the vehicles 

existing ECUs. 

Write Cal Values 

This option enables the user to re-calibrate the suspension on Range Rover vehicles 

fitted with Air Suspension. 

Air Suspension System (Ride Level Module - RLM) 

• Discovery III (L319) (2005 - 2009) 

• Range Rover Sport (L320) (2005 - 2009) 

• Range Rover (L322) (2006 - 2009) 

There are several functions available via the OmiCheck. 

• Set Operating Mode. 

• Set Tolerance Control Mode. 

• Deflation Routines. 

Set Operating Mode 

This procedure is used to set the RLM to different modes. Modes can be set under 

the ‘Configuration’ option of the OmiCheck. The current operating mode can be 

displayed under the ‘Live Data’ option of the OmiCheck. 

Pre-test conditions 

• The ignition must be ON. 


supply. 

Normal Mode 

This is the normal operating mode for the RLM. 

238

Manufacturing Mode 


This mode is mainly used in the factory when assembling the vehicle. It can, however, 

also be used if the owner of the vehicle wishes to fit coil springs instead of the air 

springs. Placing the control module in this mode ensures that the control module 

continues to function in terms of processing information such as height information. 

This process will render the Air Suspension controls and instruments non-functional. 

NOTE: If the vehicle is driven in any mode other than Normal Mode, the Air 

Suspension will NOT operate correctly. 

Set Tolerance Control 

This procedure is used to set the RLM tolerance control. Tolerance control can be set 

under the ‘Configuration’ option of the OmiCheck. The current tolerance control state 

can be displayed under the ‘Live Data’ option of the OmiCheck. 




supply. 

Normal Tolerances 

This state is the normal operating mode for the Air Suspension system. 

Tighter Tolerances 

This state is used when another part of the vehicle is being aligned or calibrated. The 

two main instances where this state is used are: 

• Wheel alignment; 

• Adaptive Headlamp calibration. 

Deflation Routines 

There are several routines available for this system. 

• Deflate air springs 

• Deflate reservoir 

• Deflate all (air springs and reservoir) 

• Exit deflate mode. 

239


Pre-test conditions: 

• The ignition must be ON; 


supply. 

NOTE: The vehicle will lower during deflation of the air suspension. To avoid damage, 

ensure all doors are closed. 

WARNING: It is the responsibility of the technician to ensure that air has been 

fully expelled from the air suspension system even if the OmiCheck indicates 

that the routine has completed successfully. The procedure may need to be run 

more than once to ensure all air is expelled from the system. Failure to do so 

may result in personal injury. 

Exit Deflate Mode 

After the work has been completed the technician must re-enable the system using 

the ‘Exit Deflate Mode’ option to restore normal operation of the air suspension 

system. 

Air Suspension System (EHC2) 

• Range Rover (L322) (2002 - 2006) 

There are four functions available via the OmiCheck for the EHC2 air suspension 

system. 

• Actuators 

• Set Operating Mode 

• Set Tolerance Control Mode 

• Deflation Routines 

Actuators 

There are a number of actuators available on the OmiCheck. These are split into two 

different sections. 

Level Selection 

The OmiCheck can be used to force the air suspension system to any level as an 

alternative to using the ride height switch inside the vehicle. 

• Access Level. 

• Motorway Level. 

• Standard Level. 

• Off-road Level. 

These are useful for the diagnosis of faults with the ride height switch and wiring. 

240

Pre-test conditions: 

• The engine must be RUNNING. 

Drive Outputs 


The following outputs can be driven individually using the OmiCheck. 

• Front right valve 

• Front left valve 

• Rear right valve 

• Rear left valve 

• Exhaust valve 

• Reservoir valve 

• Compressor valve 

• High-pressure exhaust valve 

• Front cross-link valve 

• Rear cross-link valve 

• Access LED 

• Motorway LED 

• Standard LED 

• Off-road LED 

• Hold LED 


• The ignition must be ON and the engine OFF. 

Set Operating Mode 

There are four functions available via the OmiCheck for the EHC2 system. 

• Transport mode 

• Low Tolerance Mode (used during wheel alignment or headlamp levelling) 

• Production Mode (used to disable all control circuits within the system) 

• Normal Mode (to cancel all of the above). 

There procedures are used to set the control module to different modes. Modes can 

be set under the ‘Service Functions’ option of the OmiCheck. The current operating 

mode can be displayed under the ‘Live Data’ option of the OmiCheck. 

241





supply. 

NOTE: If the vehicle is driven in any mode other than ‘Normal Mode’, the air 

suspension will not operate correctly. 

Deflation Routines 

There are seven routines available for this system. 

• Deflate right front 

• Deflate left front 

• Deflate right rear 

• Deflate left rear 

• Deflate front 

• Deflate rear 

• Deflate all 

These routines for use prior to servicing the air suspension system to reduce the risk 

of injury by compressed air. 




supply. 

NOTE: The vehicle will lower during deflation of the air suspension. To avoid damage, 


WARNING: It is the responsibility of the technician to ensure that air has been 

fully expelled from the air suspension system even if the OmiCheck indicates 

that the routine has completed successfully. The procedure may need to be run 

more than once to ensure all air is expelled from the system. Failure to do so 

may result in personal injury. 

242

Inflation 


When work has been completed on the specified area the air suspension can be 

re-inflated either by selecting the corresponding ‘Inflation’ routine or by starting the 

engine. When the engine is running, the system will inflate the four corners to the 

correct height for the currently selected level. 

Inflation Routines 

There are seven routines available for this system. 

• Inflate right front 

• Inflate left front 

• Inflate right rear 

• Inflate left rear 

• Inflate front 

• Inflate rear 

• Inflate all 

These routines are to be used either when work has been completed on a section of 

the air suspension system or to try and level the vehicle in an emergency repair 

situation. 

NOTE: The vehicle will raise during inflation of the air suspension. To avoid damage, 





supply. 

NOTE: These routines may need to be repeated more than once to completely inflate 

the specified area. 

243


Mercedes 

If the vehicle under test has both the round diagnostic connector and the J1962 (16 

pin) connector, the round connector should always be used to access information via 

the Mercedes application and the J1962 connector should be used to access data via 

the EOBD application. 

Sensotronic BC 

WARNING: 

• Always deactivate the Sensotronic BC before carrying out any maintenance 

work. 

• Only fully-qualified technicians should carry out work on the brake system. 

They must be familiar with modern brake systems. 

• Only carry out maintenance work when the vehicle is stationary. 

• Only carry out maintenance work on the brake after the system has been 

deactivated. 

• Upon deactivation, a warning message should appear in the instrument 

panel and an audible warning signal is heard until the maintenance work is 

complete and the system reactivated. 

• If the warning signals do not occur, assume that the system is not fully 

deactivated and do not carry out any maintenance work. 


the maintenance of the Sensotronic brake system. 

From the sub-menu select the Control Module and follow the on-screen instructions. 

The OmiCheck will attempt to establish communications with the vehicle. Once 

established, follow the on screen instructions for each test. 

On selecting the item the following sub-menu will be displayed: 

1. Read Faults 

2. Clear Faults 

244

MG Rover 


Tuning with OmiCheck 

Ensure all electrical loads are off, select 'Tune' and follow the instructions on the 

OmiCheck. The OmiCheck will now take you through the tune. 

Stepper Motor Setting 

The stepper motor is set in the following manner. The engine is kept constant, 

controlled by the ECU and will not change. Any adjustment of the air by-pass screw 

will change the position of the stepper motor. The OmiCheck uses graphics to instruct 

the operator to 'raise' or 'lower' the stepper motor position. The stepper motor position 

is displayed on the screen and is only used to guide the operator to ensure the screw 

is turned in the correct direction. 

245 

This screen indicates the stepper position 

needs to be increased 'coarsely'. 


needs to be increased 'finely'. 


needs to be decreased 'coarsely'. 


needs to be decreased 'finely'.


If the OmiCheck screen displays 'Lower', an adjustment is required to lower the 

stepper motor position. For this to happen the air by-pass screw needs adjusting as 

if to raise the engine speed. 

If the OmiCheck screen displays 'Raise', an adjustment is required to raise the 

stepper motor position. For this to happen the air by-pass screw needs adjusting as 

if to lower the engine speed. 

NOTE: Adjustment of the air by-pass screw will not change the engine speed as it is 

under control of the ECU. 

Press if unable to set correctly using air by-pass or throttle adjustment. 

ECU Replacement 

The MEMS idle control is an adaptive system and the ECU `learns' the engine load 

and wear characteristics over a period of time. The amount of stepper motor 

movement required to maintain the specified idle consequently will differ from model 

to model. In the event of a new ECU or an ECU from another vehicle being fitted, it 

will take a short period of normal running for the ECU to learn the load and wear 

characteristics of that engine. 

WARNING: Whenever a different ECU is fitted, a full tune with the OmiCheck 

must take place, as idle CO 2 and stepper position could differ, which can ONLY 

be set by adjusting the ECU. 

Immobilisation 

Follow the on-screen instructions to perform a security check and if security is 

supported, program the alarm immobilisation. 

Maintenance 

The maintenance selection allows the resetting of the adaptations to factory settings 

for the components listed in the menu. It is recommended that the adaptations be 

reset to factory settings as opposed to the 'learned' settings once the components 

have been replaced. 

246 


is correct and the 'Tick' key can be 

pressed.

Mitsubishi 


1995 MY Onwards 

With vehicles fitted with the J1962 OBD type diagnostic connectors, the OmiCheck 

cannot retrieve blink code faults using the standard OmiCheck leads. 

ABS 

ABS faults can be obtained by bridging the pins 1 and 4 (GND) on the vehicle's J1962 

connector. The diagnostic malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) located on the dashboard 

flashes blink codes. Interpret the blink codes - See 'Interpretation of Blink Codes'. The 

fault description relating to the fault code is detailed in the table below. 

ABS Fault Code Look up Table 

Fault Code Description 

11 Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Front - Open Circuit 

12 Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front - Open Circuit 

13 Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Rear - Open Circuit 

14 Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Rear - Open Circuit 

15 Wheel Speed Sensors - Signal Out of Limits 

16 Supply Voltage 

21 Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Front - Short Circuit 

22 Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front - Short Circuit 

23 Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Rear - Short Circuit 

24 Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Rear - Short Circuit 

38 Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch 

41 Solenoid Valve, RH Front Inlet 

42 Solenoid Valve, LH Front Inlet 

43 Solenoid Valve, RH Rear Inlet 

44 Solenoid Valve, LH Rear Inlet 

45 Solenoid Valve, RH Front Outlet 

46 Solenoid Valve, LH Front Outlet 

47 Solenoid Valve, RH Rear Outlet 

48 Solenoid Valve, LH Rear Outlet 

51 Solenoid Valve - Supply Voltage 

53 Electronic Control Module (ECM) 

63 Hydraulic Pump Motor 

71 Pyrotechnic Pretensioner, Passengers Side - Short Circuit to Positive 

247


72 Pyrotechnic Pretensioner, Passengers Side - Short Circuit to 

Negative 

73 Pyrotechnic Pretensioner, Passengers Side - Short Circuit 

74 Pyrotechnic Pretensioner, Passengers Side - Open Circuit 

Interpretation of Blink Codes 

Note all fault codes using these guidelines: 

• Short Flash - Indicates 'Units' of fault code. 

• Long flash - Indicates 'Tens' of fault code. 

• Short pause - Between 'Tens' and 'Units' of the same fault code. 

• Long pause - Between different fault codes. 

248

Nissan 


Transmission 

CVT transmission faults on the Micra 1992-1999 can be read via the transmission 

lamp on the instrument panel: 

1. Turning ignition OFF 

2. Move transmission selector to position 'D' 

3. Turn ignition ON 

4. Ensure transmission warning lamp illuminates 

5. Depress brake pedal fully and hold 

6. Depress accelerator pedal fully and hold 

7. Move transmission selector to the following positions: From position 'D' to 'Ds' to 

'D' to 'N' to 'R' to 'P' 

8. Release accelerator pedal 

9. Start engine and allow to idle 

10. The transmission warning lamp will illuminate for 2.5 seconds followed by several 

short flashes 

NOTE: Continual flashing of the transmission warning lamp indicates system 

voltage to high or low. 

No fault codes recorded: All short flashes will be the same. 

Fault codes recorded: 1 short flash will be longer that the others 

When finished turn ignition off and rectify faults as necessary 

Flashes/Fault Codes FAULT 

1 Accelerator pedal position (APP) switch 1 & 2 - Circuit 

malfunction 

2 Transmission range (TR) switch - Circuit malfunction 

3 Vehicle speed sensor (VSS) - Circuit malfunction 

4 Transmission electromagnet clutch - Circuit malfunction 

5 Transmission fluid pressure (TFP) solenoid - Circuit 

malfunction 

6 Transmission control module (TCM)/Engine control module 

(ECM) torque signal 

7 Transmission control module (TCM/ABS) Control module/idle 

speed control (ISC) relay - Circuit malfunction 

Clearing Codes: Switching off ignition erases trouble codes. 

249


Renault 

EMS 

General 

NOTE: For Renault vehicles which use the ‘Renault Card Keyless Ignition System’ 

and the ‘START’ button (Megane II, Scenic II etc.): 

To switch the ignition on WITHOUT starting the engine: 

1. Unlock the car with the remote (card). 

2. Insert the card into the card reader. 

3. Without pressing the brake or clutch pedal push and hold the ‘START’ button for 

at least 5 seconds. The dash should illuminate and the button should be 

released. 

All diagnostics can now be carried out. 






The function is available on most of the following Engine Management Systems: 

• Bosch EDC15C3, fitted to 1.9 DCi and 2.2 DCi engines. 

• Bosch EDC16, fitted to 1.9DCi and 2.0DCi engines. 

• Delphi Lucas LVCR, fitted to 1.5 DCi engines. 

• Delphi Lucas DDCR, fitted to 1.5 DCi engines. 

Injectors are classified in the factory according to their respective flow: at idle speed, 

when fully charged or in the pre-injection phase. 

For the Bosch systems a 6-digit alphanumeric code is engraved on the Injector 

indicating the classification. For the Delphi Lucas systems a 16-digit alphanumeric 

code is engraved on the Injector indicating the classification. 

The code for each injector is stored in the memory of the ECU, enabling the ECU to 

control each injector taking into account the variations in their manufacture. 

The OmiCheck has the ability to read out the current injector codes and program in 

new ones. 

250

Airbag 


Select the airbag system then select either 12-pin or 16-pin according to which 

connector is on the vehicle under test. Then follow the on-screen instructions. 

The following functions are available for the airbag system: 

1. Read DTCs: Displays all diagnostic trouble codes associated with the airbag 

system. 

2. Clear DTCs: Clears all faults codes from the airbag system. 

3. Renault Arm/Disarm for Driver/Passenger Airbag: 

The Disarm CM (LOCK) menu option allows the driver airbag to be disabled 

preventing accidental deployment while working on the car. 

The Arm CM (UNLOCK) menu option causes the driver airbag to become active. 

The Disarm Passenger (LOCK) menu option allows the passenger airbag to be 

disabled preventing accidental deployment while working on the car. 

The Arm Passenger (UNLOCK) menu option causes the passenger airbag to become 

active. 

NOTE: Not all vehicles will have a passenger airbag and some vehicles with a 

passenger airbag cannot be armed/disarmed using a diagnostic tool (they require a 

key to be inserted into the arm/disarm lock located next to the passenger airbag). 

The way the user is notified by the vehicle of a locked airbag depends upon the 

vehicle model. 

Vehicle Notification methods for a locked airbag 

Method 1 - Fault Code present. 

If the user reads airbag diagnostic codes after an airbag has been locked some 

models will produce a 'Airbag locked' fault code. After unlocking, this fault code will 

not appear, this can be confirmed by reading the diagnostic codes again. 

Method 2 - Airbag MIL stays on 


display will remain on, when the airbag is unlocked the MIL will switch off. 

Method 3 - Airbag MIL flashes for several seconds when turning the ignition on 


display will flash for several seconds when the ignition is turned on, when the airbag 

is unlocked the MIL will switch off. 

251


Renault 

TPMS is the Tyre Pressure Monitoring System. 

Each valve sensor has a unique code and is matched to a particular wheel. This is 

programmed into the UCH control module. This enables a faulty wheel to be identified 

(given that the receiver can identify which wheel is transmitting). The sensor emits an 

RF (Radio Frequency) signal containing the valve code, status and tyre pressure. If 

wheels are to be swapped around then reprogramming will need to be carried out to 

identify the new position of the wheel. 

Each valve sensor has a coloured ring attached to the valve nut, each colour 

corresponds to a particular wheel position: 

Front Left: Green 

Front Right: Yellow 

Rear Left: Red 

Rear Right: Black 

It is recommended that if tyres are moved around that the coloured rings are replaced 

in the correct wheel position. 

Each valve sensor will emit a signal every hour if stationary, and every 15 minutes if 

a leak is present. If moving it will emit a signal every minute if no leak present, and 

every 10 seconds if a leak is present. 

NOTE: In the live data the tyre pressures will display a default value of 3.5 bar until 

the valves have been forced to transmit. 

252



This feature allows the user to read and clear faults, view live data, test the TPMS 

display lights and reprogram the unit via the Command Menu. 

The Command Menu features are: 

1. Program tyre valves - This allows the user to program 1 valve or 4 valves by 

a. Manually entering the valve code from the keypad. The code is written on a 

label if the sensor is new, or if the sensor is used then remove the tyre and 

read the code on the sensor 

b. Automatically forcing the valve to emit the code by using an exciter (such as 

the Omitec OmiDetect tool), or deflating the tyre pressure by at least 1 bar, 

or rotating the wheel by more than 20 km/h. When deflating the tyre the valve 

will not transmit until 15 minutes has elapsed. 

NOTE: If fault code 0007 is present, automatic coding will not be possible. 

When using the exciter it should be placed resting on the tyre under the 

appropriate valve. When the sensor has been excited and the transmitted 

code has been received the OmiCheck will indicate a successful read. The 

option is then given to program the new code. 

2. Select the winter tyre option - This is used during the winter in some countries 

where the weather conditions require winter tyres. 

3. Select the summer tyre option - This is used as default or during the summer 

when winter tyres are changed. 

4. Set control module with TPMS option - Programs the control module with the 

TPMS option. 

5. Set control module without TPMS option - Disables the TPMS option. 

6. Set tyre pressure limits - Enables the setting of maximum and minimum tyre 

pressure limits. 

7. Change trigger limit. 

8. Drive the actuator - Tests the TPMS display lights. 

253






An option is given as to select the current tyre set (Summer/Winter). Follow the on 

screen instructions which indicate the order the wheels are to be programmed in. 

After operating the exciter alongside the requested wheel, if successful a message 

will be displayed on the screen indicating that the valve code has been detected and 

displaying the valve code. After all 4 wheel codes have been successfully detected 

then an option is given to program the codes. 


TPMS Trouble shooting 

If a valve appears to not respond when stimulated with an exciter tool, check the 

following: 

• The tyre valve is a TPMS valve. 

• The exciter is not pointing directly at the valve stem. The valve stem is metal and 

will prevent a good RF signal. On low profile tyres, the area for the RF to penetrate 

the tyre sidewall is small, carefully aim the exciter half-way between the tyre rim 

and the tread. 

• Check the batteries are not low in the exciter and the TPMS valve. 

• If there is no response from the valve after the checks have been made then it 

could be that the TPMS valve itself is faulty. 

Electronic Parking Brakes 

WARNING: 

• Ensure that you are fully familiar with the braking system and its operation 

before commencing any work. 

• The Electronic Parking Brake Control system may be required to be 

deactivated before carrying out any Maintenance/diagnostic work on the 

brake system. This can be done from the OmiCheck menu. 

• Only carry out maintenance work when the vehicle is stationary. 

• Ensure that the Electronic Parking Brake Control system is reactivated after 

the maintenance work has been completed. 


the maintenance of the Electronic Parking Brake system. 

254

User Menu 

Overview 

1. 

USER MENU 

OBD DTC Lookup 

2. Language Menu 

3. Tester Setup 

4. Self Test 

5. Software Version 

6. Security 

7. CAN Converter 

255 

User Menu 

Use the 

selection. 

and keys to select the required function and press to confirm the 

NOTE: Press to return to the Main Menu. 

OBD DTC Lookup 

This option is used to look up a description of a known DTC. 

1. Use the key to move the cursor under the required DTC character, then 

using the and keys, change the characters as required. 

2. Press the key to confirm DTC. 

3. Press to return to the User Menu. 

If the unit recognises the DTC, the screen will display the full description, i.e. P0100 

- Mass or Volume Air Flow 'A' Circuit. 

Where more that one description is available, a separate menu will appear for you to 

select the appropriate option. 

If a code is not recognised the message 'No Text Allocated for this Code' is displayed. 

NOTE: Press to return to the User Menu. 

Language Menu 

The language menu allows you to change the software language if available. 

1. Use the and keys to select the required language. 

2. Press to confirm the selection. 

NOTE: This menu is only enabled when more than one language is installed on 

the OmiCheck. If only one language is installed, the message 'Not Enabled' will 

be displayed when the Language Menu option is selected and the display will 

return to the User Menu.

User Menu 

Tester Setup 

The tester setup allows you to change the live data units or change the way live data 

is displayed. 

1. Select 'Live Data Units' from the Tester Setup menu. 

1. 

LIVE DATA UNITS 

Metric Units 

2. Imperial Units 

3. American Units 

2. The currently selected live data units will be displayed on the screen. e.g. 'Metric 

Units set', before displaying the available options. 

3. Use the and keys to select the preferred units of measurement and confirm 

by pressing the key. After updating, the unit returns to the Tester Setup menu. 

4. Select 'Live Data Display' from the Tester Setup menu. 

1. 

LIVE DATA DISPLAY 

Normal Text 

2. Abbreviations 

5. The currently selected live data display option will appear on the screen, e.g. 

'Normal Text Set', before displaying the available options. 

6. Use the and keys to select the preferred display option and confirm by 

pressing the key. After updating, the unit returns to the Tester Setup menu 

256

Self Test 

1. Use the and keys to select the required test. 

2. Press to confirm selection. 

3. Follow on-screen instructions to carry out specified test. 

4. Press the or key as appropriate, to return to the Self Test Menu. 

Software Version 

1. 

SELF TEST MENU 

Run Self Test 

2. Flash Test 

3. Memory Test 

4. IIC Memory Test 

5. Vehicle Com Test 

6. PWM J1850 Test 

7. VPW J1850 Test 

8. CAN Comms Test 

9. Key Pad Test 

10. Display Test 

11. Display All Char 

12. Print All Data 

257 

User Menu 

1. Once selected, the OmiCheck version number appears on the screen before 

displaying a list of all software modules, including version numbers, currently 

loaded onto the OmiCheck. 

2. Use the and keys to scroll through the software module list. 

3. Press the or key to return to the User Menu.

User Menu 

Security 

Most of the applications on the OmiCheck are 'locked' by a security key. To unlock a 

particular application the appropriate security key must be obtained from Omitec 

Limited and entered into the OmiCheck. If the expected applications are not displayed 

in the main menu it could be that the security key has not been entered, or is incorrect. 

To examine or enter a security key, enter the Security option. The following menu will 

be displayed: 

Show SecurityKey 

1. Once selected, the security key is displayed on the screen as 20 characters. If it 

is incorrect the message 'Key is Invalid' will be displayed as well, and the 

may be pressed for further information which may be asked for by product 

support. 

key 

2. Press the or key to return to the User Menu. 

Enter SecurityKey 

1. 

SECURITY 

Show SecurityKey 

2. Enter SecurityKey 

3. Unit Serial No. 

This option is used to enter the security key to unlock the application loaded on the 

OmiCheck. 

1. Select 'Enter SecurityKey' from the security menu. 

2. Using the and keys, scroll through the alpha/numerical character list. 

3. Confirm each character by pressing the key. 

4. If you make a mistake use the key and enter the correct character. To 

re-enter the code from the beginning, press the key. 

5. When prompted to verify the security key, press to confirm. 

6. Restart the OmiCheck either by disconnecting and reconnecting the power 

supply or by pressing the outer 4 buttons on the handset at the same time. 

Note: The button displays on-screen instructions. The button may be used to 

cancel the operation and the original key will be retained. 

258

Unit Serial No. 

259 

User Menu 

1. Once selected, the serial number of the OmiCheck is displayed on the screen. 

This should match the number on the back of the unit. The serial number may be 

requested by product support when issuing security numbers. The user cannot 

change this number. 

2. Press the key to return to the User Menu.

Glossary of terms 

Term Description 

4WAS 4 Wheel Air Suspension 

4X4M 4X4 Control Module 

AAG Trailer Connection Unit 

AAM All Activity Module 

ABS Anti-Lock Brake / Traction Control Module 

A/C Air Conditioning 

AC Air Cleaner 

ACM Audio Control Module 

AFCM Alternative Fuel Control Module 

AIR Secondary Air Injection 

ALWRM (Right) Headlamp Range adjustment - Right 

ALWRS (Left) Headlamp Range adjustment - Left 

ARC Automatic Ride Control 

ART Intelligent cruise control 

A/T Automatic Transmission or Transaxle 

SAP Accelerator Pedal 

B+ Battery positive voltage 

BARO Barometric Pressure 

BNS Vehicle Power Supply Control Module 

CAC Charge Air Cooler 

CARB Californian Air Resources Board 

CCM_GEM Generic electric module 

CDP Compact Disc Player 

CFI Continuous Fuel Injection or Central Fuel Injection 

CL Closed Loop 

CKP Crankshaft Position Sensor 

CKP REF Crankshaft Reference 

CM Control Module 

CMP Camshaft Position Sensor 

CMP REF Camshaft Reference 

CO Carbon Monoxide 

CO2 Carbon Dioxide 

CPP Clutch Pedal Position 

260 

Appendix A: Glossary


CSM Central Security Module 

CTM Central Timer Module 

CTOX Continuous Trap Oxidizer 

CTP Closed Throttle Position 

DCSM Driver Climate-Control Seat Module 

DDM Drivers Door Module 

DEPS Digital Engine Position Sensor 

DFCO Decel Fuel Cut-off Mode 

DFDM Driver Door Control Unit 

DFI Direct Fuel Injection 

DFSM Driver Front Seat Module 

DLC Data Link Connector 

DRDM Rear Left Door Control Unit 

DSM Drivers Seat Module 

DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code 

DTM Diagnostic Test Mode 

EAMK Extended Activity Module 

EATC Electronic Automatic Temperature Control 

EBCM Electronic Brake Control Module 

EBTCM Electronic Brake Traction Control Module 

EC Engine Control 

ECM Engine Control Module 

ECL Engine Coolant Level 

ECS Electronic Crash Sensor (Airbag) 

ECT Engine Coolant Temperature 

EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read only Memory 

EFE Early Fuel Evaporation 

EGR Exhaust Gas Re-circulation 

EGRT EGR Temperature 

EGS Electronic Transmission System 

EI Electronic Ignition 

EM Engine Modification 

EOBD European On-Board Diagnostics 

EPB Electric Parking Brake 

EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory 

EPS Electronic-Controlled Power Steering 

261

262 


ESV (Driver) Drivers Electronic Seat Adjustment 

ESV 

(Passenger) 

Passenger Electronic Seat Adjustment 

EVAP Evaporative Emission System 

EWM Electronic Gear Selection 

FACM Fuel Additive Control Module 

FBM Drive Authorization Module 

FC Fan Control 

FEEPROM Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory 

FEM Front Electronic Module 

FF Flexible Fuel 

FFH Fuel Fired Coolant Heating Module 

FICM Fuel Injection Control Module 

FIM Fuel Indication Module 

FOH Fuel Operated Heater 

FP Fuel Pump 

FPROM Flash Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory 

FSSM Fire Suppression System Module 

FT Fuel Trim 

FTP Federal Test Procedure 

GCM Governor Control Module 

GDM Generic Display Module 

GEM Generic Electronic Module 

GEN Generator 

GND Ground 

H2O Water 

HO2S Heated Oxygen Sensor 

HO2S1 Upstream Heated Oxygen Sensor 

HO2S2 Up or Downstream Heated Oxygen Sensor 

HO2S3 Downstream Heated Oxygen Sensor 

HC Hydrocarbon 

HCM Headlamp Control Module 

HEC Hybrid Electronic Cluster 

HVS High Voltage Switch 

HVAC Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning system 

IA Intake Air


IABM Integrated Air Bag Module 

IAC Idle Air Control 

IAT Intake Air Temperature 

IC Ignition Control Circuit 

IC Instrument Cluster (Ford) 

ICM Ignition Control Module 

ICU Injector Control Unit 

IF1/IF2/FFZ IR / RF Remote controlled central locking 

IFI Indirect Fuel Injection 

IFS Inertia Fuel Shut-off 

I/M Inspection/Maintenance 

INST Instrument cluster 

IPC Instrument Panel Cluster 

ISC Idle Speed Control 

ISU Central junction box 

J1962 The SAE standard that defines the 16-pin connector used for EOBD 

KFB Convenience Feature 

KI Instrument Cluster 

KOEC Key On, Engine Cranking 

KOEO Key On, Engine Off 

KOER Key On, Engine Running 

KS Knock Sensor 

KSM Knock Sensor Module 

LCM Lighting Control Module 

LHID Left High Intensity Discharge Lamp 

LPSDM Left Power Sliding Door Module 

LT Long Term Fuel Trim 

LWR Headlamp Range adjustment 

MAF Mass Airflow Sensor 

MAP Manifold Absolute Pressure sensor 

MC Message Center Module 

MC Mixture Control (Ford) 

MDP Manifold Differential Pressure 

MFI Multi-port Fuel Injection 

MFSW Multifunction Steering Wheel 

MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp 

263

MPH miles per hour 

MST Manifold Surface Temperature 

MVZ Manifold Vacuum Zone 

MY Model Year 

NAV Navigation Controller 

NGSC Next Generation Speed Control Module 

NVRAM Non-Volatile Random Access Memory 

NOX Oxides of Nitrogen 

O2S Oxygen Sensor 

OBD On-Board Diagnostics 

OBD I On-Board Diagnostics generation one 

OBD-II On-Board Diagnostics, second generation 

OC Oxidation Catalyst 

OCS Occupant Classification System Module 

OTC Overhead Trip Computer 

OL Open Loop 

OSC Oxygen Sensor Storage 

PAIR Pulsed Secondary Air Injection 

PAM Parking Aid Module 

PARKTRONIC Parking Aid / Parking Assist 

PATS Passive Anti-Theft System 

PCM Powertrain Control Module 

PCSM Passenger Climate-Control Seat Module 

PCV Positive Crankcase Ventilation 

PDM Passengers Door Control Unit 

PNP Park/Neutral switch 

PRB Power Running Board 

PRDM Rear Right Door Control Unit 

PROM Program Read Only Memory 

PSA Pressure Switch Assembly 

PSE Pneumatic Equipment System 

PSP Power Steering Pressure 

PTOX Periodic Trap Oxidizer 

RAM Random Access Memory 

RAP Remote Anti-Theft / Personality Module 

RASM Rear Air Suspension Module 

264 



RCC Remote Climate Control (Air Conditioning) 

RCM Restraint Control Module 

REM Rear Electronic Module 

RETM Rear Seat Entertainment Module 

RHID Right High Intensity Discharge Lamp 

RKE Remote Keyless Entry 

RM Relay Module 

RPSDM Right Power Sliding Door Module 

ROM Read Only Memory 

RPM revolutions per minute 

SAMB Signal Acquisition and Control module Passenger side 

SAMF/SAMV Signal Acquisition and Control module Front/Driver side 

SAMH Signal Acquisition and Control module Rear 

SC Supercharger 

SCB Supercharger Bypass 

OmiCheck OmiPro/OmiCheck 

SDARS Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System 

SDM Sensing Diagnostic Mode 

SFI Sequential Fuel Injection 

SRI Service Reminder Indicator 

SRM Speech Recognition Module 

SRT System Readiness Test 

SSGB 

(Passenger) 

Passengers Seat Position Memory 

SSGF (Driver) Drivers Seat Position Memory 

ST Short Term Fuel Trim 

TB Throttle Body 

TBC Trailer Brake Control Module 

TBI Throttle Body Injection 

TC Turbocharger 

TCC Torque Converter Clutch 

TCM Transmission or Transaxle Control Module 

TFP Throttle Fluid Pressure 

TP Throttle Position 

TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 

TPS Throttle Position Sensor 

265

TVV Thermal Vacuum Valve 

TWC Three Way Catalyst 

TWC+OC Three Way + Oxidation Catalytic Converter 

VAF Volume Airflow 

VAPS Variable Assist Power Steering 

VCM Vehicle Control Module 

VDM Vehicle Dynamics Module 

VR Voltage Regulator 

VS Vehicle Sensor 

VSM Vehicle Security Module 

VSS Vehicle Speed Sensor 

WU-TWC Warm Up Three Way Catalytic Converter 

WOT Wide Open Throttle 

266 



Cables 

Cable Identification 

CR0234 

OM3000/10 - J1962/EOBD cable 

OG2012 - Peugeot/Citroen PSA 2 pin cable 

267

CR0231 

CR0230 

OG2013 - PSA 30 pin cable 

OC2022 - VAG cable 

268 

Appendix B: Cables


OM1572 

CR0227 

OG2024 - Land Rover Lucas 14CUX cable 

OG2009 - Sprinter lead 

269

CR0228 

CR0235 

OG2002 - BMW cable 

OG2023 - Fiat/Alfa Romeo/Lancia 

270 

Appendix B: Cables


Diagnostic Connector Locations 

Diagnostic Connector Locations 

Audi 80, 100, 200 (to 1991) & V8: - 

Dashboard - Driver side. 

100 (from 1991): - Dashboard - 

passenger side. 

A4: - Passenger ashtray - Rear - 

Centre. 

A6 (to mid 1994): - Relay box - 

Engine compartment. 

A8: - Dashboard - Centre. 

Alfa 

Romeo 

Generally 16 pin J1962 

connectors are found under the 

driver’s side dashboard or in the 

fuse box. 

271 

2-pin 

ISO 9141 

or J1962 

J1962 

16 

8 

OM1038 

9 

1


Alfa 

Romeo 

3 Pin Connectors 

EMS 

• Engine compartment – 

normally centre: 

145, 146, 155 


normally right: 

33 


normally left: 

146 

• Front door post – bottom: 

155, 164 

• Under dashboard – 

passenger side or in fuse 

box: 

GTV/Spider 

Airbag/ABS 



145, 146, 155, GTV/Spider 



145, 146, 155, 164, GTV/ 

Spider 

• Under dashboard – driver’s 

side: 

147,156,166,GTV/Spider 

• Passenger glove box: 

145, 146, GTV/Spider 

272 

3-pin


BMW The vehicle's diagnostic 

connector (20-pin round 

connector) is always found in the 

engine compartment. 

If the vehicle is fitted with a 

J1962 diagnostic connector, this 

can usually be located in the 

driver's footwell behind a cover. 

NOTE: If the BMW vehicle under 

test has both the round (20 pin) 

diagnostic connector and the 

J1962 (16 pin) connector, the 

round connector should always 

be used to access information 

via the BMW application and the 

J1962 connector should be used 

to access data via the EOBD 

application (ensure the cap is 

fitted to the 20-pin connector). If 

the cap is not fitted, the J1962 

connector will not function 

correctly. 

273 

20-pin 

round 

connector 

or J1962


Citroen The vehicle's diagnostic 30-pin 

connector (J1962 16-pin) can be connector 

found in the following locations: or 2-pin 

connector 

AX (1997), Berlingo I: - Under 

dashboard - driver's side 

C1: - Under dashboard, driver’s 

side to left of steering column. 

C2, C3I, C8, Dispatch, Evasion, 

Jumpy, Xantia, Xsara, Xsara 

Picasso: - Diver’s side, fascia 

fuse box. 

C3 II: - Passenger glove box, 

fuse compartment. 

C4 / C4 Picasso: - Centre 

console storage behind ashtray. 

C5 I / C5 II: - Compartment 

inside passenger’s glovebox 

C6: - Rear centre console 

glovebox under plastic matting. 

Saxo: - Under dashboard - 

passenger side. 

The vehicle's diagnostic 

connector (2-pin) can be found in 

the following locations: 

AX, BX (to 1995), C15, Jumper, 

Relay, XM, ZX (to 1997): - 

Engine compartment near 

suspension turret or battery. 

BX (1996 on), ZX (1997 on): - 

Engine compartment fusebox. 


connector (30-pin) can be found 

in the following locations: 

Berlingo I, Evasion, Synergie: 

- Under dashboard, driver's side. 

Dispatch, Jumpy, Xantia, XM: - 

Driver’s side, fascia fuse box. 

Saxo: - Passenger side - under 

dashboard, passenger door end. 

Fiat Generally 16 pin J1962 



fuse box with the exception of 

the Palio/RST where it is in the 

centre console, under the 

handbrake. 

J1962 

274 

OM0977


Fiat 3 Pin Connectors 

EMS 

3-pin 



Barchetta, Bravo-Brava, 

Marea, Palio, Premio, Punto, 

Tempra 



Cinquecento, Palio RST, 

Seicento 


normally left/Centre Console 

Under Ashtray: 

Coupe, Fiorino, Panda, 

Punto, Scudo, Tempra, Tipo, 

Uno 

• Engine compartment – near 

battery: 

Ducato 


Croma, Panda, Tempra 

• Under dashboard – 

passenger side: 

Tipo, Uno 

Airbag/ABS 


side/passenger glove box: 

Barchetta, Bravo-Brava, 

Coupe, Doblo, Ducato, Idea, 

Marea, Multipla, Palio, 

Panda, Punto, Seicento, Stilo 



Bravo-Brava, Croma, Ducato, 

Marea, Palio, Punto, Seicento 



Bravo-Brava, Croma 

275


Ford EEC V 


connector (J1962 16-pin) can 

usually be found in one of the 

following locations: 

Courier, Fiesta, Ka: - 

Passenger compartment - 

bottom of 'A' pillar. 

Focus, Mondeo, Scorpio: - 

Central junction box - below 

steering column. 

Galaxy: - Behind ashtray- centre 

console. 

Transit: - Passenger 

compartment fuse box - behind 

spare fuse tray. 

Puma: - Passenger side - 

bottom of 'A' pillar. 

Cougar: - Under dash panel - 

centre. 

EEC IV - DCL 

Use the Ford EECIV cable as 

specified in the application list. 

The vehicle diagnostic connect 

(J1962 16 pin) can usually be 

located: 

Escort: - Passenger 

compartment - bottom of 'A' 

pillar. 

Mondeo: - Below steering 

column. 

The 2-pin connector is usually 

located: 

Escort: - Black connector with a 

red dust cover - engine 

compartment over wheel arch. 

Battery clips (OM100/16 & 

OM100/17) will also be required 

for power. 

276 

J1962 or 

Ford EEC 

IV cable

GM 

Vauxhall/ 

Opel 


The vehicle’s diagnostic 

connector (J1962 16-pin) can be 

found in the following locations: 

Corsa C, Astra G, Astra H, 

Meriva, Vectra B, Zafira A, 

Zafira B: - Below cover - front of 

handbrake. 

Agila, Tigra, Speedster/VX220, 

Sintra, Vivaro: - 

Below dashboard - driver’s side. 

Astra F, Corsa B, Omega B: - 

Fuse box - passenger 

compartment. 

Corsa C, Corsa D: - Centre 

console - below heater controls. 

Frontera, Vectra C, Signum: - 

Centre console - under ashtray. 



in the following locations: - 

Asona C, Astra, Belmont, 

Calibra, Carlton, Cavalier, 

Kadette, Omega A, Vectra A: - 

Under bonnet - near suspension 

turret. 

Astra, Corsa A, Nova, Tigra: - 

Fuse box - passenger 

compartment. 

Innocenti Bosch Motronic 

Next to ECU in the engine bay 

on wheel arch: 

Elba: - (1.4 & 1.6 I.E) 

IAW Marelli 

Next to the ECU under 

dashboard passenger side or 

engine bay next to fuse box: 

Mille: - (1.0 I.E) 

Lancia Generally 16 pin J1962 



fuse box with the exception of 

the Phedra where it is in the 

driver’s side footwell. 

277 

J1962 

connector 

3-pin 

connector 

or J1962 

J1962


Lancia 3 Pin Connectors 

EMS 



Delta 


normally left: 

Dedra, Y, Y10 


Dedra, Delta, Thema, Y10 

• Under dashboard – driver 

side or in fuse box: 

K 

Airbag/ABS 



Dedra, Delta Nuova, Thema, 

Y 


side: 

K/Coupe, Lybra, Musa, 

Thesis, Ypsilon 

• Passenger glove box: 

K, Y 

• In the tunnel or under 

gearbox lever: 

Delta Nuova 

Land 

Rover 

The vehicle’s diagnostic 

connector (J1962 connector) for 

the engine and ABS 

management systems is located 

either on one side of the centre 

console or inside the passenger 

footwell. 

For the Lucas 14CUX system a 5 

pin connector is located in the 

driver’s side footwell next to the 

accelerator pedal. For 

connection to the Lucas CUX 

system, the Land Rover 5 pin 

harness SB159/11 should be 

used. 

278 

3-pin 

J1962 or 

Lucas 

14CUX


Mazda The Mazda diagnostic connector 

is generally located on the left 

side of the engine bay, however 

the diagnostic connector on MX 

5 models is located near the 

brake master cylinder. The 

J1962 is located in the driver’s 

footwell under fascia. 

Mercedes 

Benz 

Engine compartment - usually 

along bulkhead, but the precise 

location may vary. 

Driver's footwell under the 

steering column or the centre 

console beneath a removable 

panel. 

Passenger's footwell under 

fascia behind removable cover. 

NOTE: For those vehicles which 

have both the round 38-pin 

connector and the OBD II 

connector: 

• The round 38-pin connector 

should always be used to 

retrieve data via the 

Mercedes application. 

• The OBD II connector should 

always be used only to 

retrieve data via the OBD II 

application. 

Some Mercedes vans have a 

14-pin round connector which is 

located under the passenger 

side dashboard, other vehicles 

may have the 16-pin OBD II 

connector. 

The 14 pin round connector 

should always be used to 

retrieve data via the Mercedes 

application. It does not support 

OBD II. 

279 

J1962 

38-pin 

round 

connector 

or J1962 or 

14-pin 

round 

connector 

(Sprinter) 

7 

11 

3 

14 

OM0973 

1 

4 

8 

12


MG Rover PGMFI 

There is no diagnostic connector 

for the PGMFI supported 

systems. The Malfunction 

Indicator Lamp (MIL) can be 

found on the ECM (Engine 

Control Module) which is located 

under the driver’s seat. There 

are two LEDs on the ECM. The 

red one is used for fault code 

retrieval. 

MEMS 1.6 SPi and MPi 

The MEMS 1.6. SPi and MPi 

diagnostic connector is located 

on the LH inner wing. 

MEMS 1.9, MEMS 2J, RC5, EC5 

and TRW SPS 

The diagnostic connector is 

located in one of three positions: 

J1962 

• Behind the ‘A’ post lower trim 

panel in the driver’s footwell. 

• On a bracket inside the 

centre console. 

The connector is often 

mounted on a bracket so that 

it faces into the console. If this 

is the case, the J1962 socket 

needs to be removed from the 

bracket before connection can 

be made. To remove the 

diagnostic socket, squeeze 

together the two wings on the 

back of the socket and 

carefully pull the connector 

free from the bracket. 

• Early MGF: - The J1962 

connector is located inside a 

trim panel by the steering 

wheel just above the internal 

fuse box. 

NOTE: The MEMS 1.9 

systems require the use of a 

dongle which is to be 

connected in-line with the 

standard J1962 (16-pin) 

cable. 

The MEMS 1.6 systems 

require the use of a lead 

specifically designed for 

those systems. 

280


Nissan The J1962 16-pin diagnostic 

connector can be found in the 


Micra: - Driver’s footwell. 

Almera / Almera Tino: - Under 

the fascia. 

Primera: - Fascia fuse box 

NOTE: For vehicles fitted with 

J1962 standard connector, 

terminals IGN (PIN-8) and CHK 

(PIN-1) must be ‘bridged out’. 

281 

J1962


Peugeot The vehicle's diagnostic 

connector (J1962 16-pin) can be 

found in the following locations: 

106: - Passenger side, under 

dashboard passenger door end. 

107: - Under dashboard, driver’s 

side, to left of steering column. 

206, 306, 806, Partner (1997 

on): - Under dashboard - driver's 

side. 

307, 406 (1997 - 2000), 807, 

Expert I: - Driver’s side, fascia 

fuse box. 

307 II: - Centre console storage 

tray behind rubber mat insert and 

ash tray. 

308: - Compartment inside 

passenger’s glovebox. 

406 (2000 - 2004): - Driver's side 

dashboard (remove small plastic 

cover). 

407, 607: - Rear centre console 

glovebox. 


connector (2-pin) can be found in 

the following locations: 

106 (to 1996): - Engine 

compartment - under ECU. 

205, 309: - Engine compartment 

- near suspension turret or 

battery. 


- near suspension turret or 

battery. 


- near battery. 

405: - Engine compartment - in 

relay box. 

Boxer: - Engine compartment - 

near suspension turret. 



in the following locations: 

106 (to 1997): - Passenger side 

- below dash. 

406 (to 1997), 605, Expert I: - 

Driver’s side fascia fuse box. 

806, Partner: - Under 

dashboard, driver's side. 

J1962 

282


Renault The J1962 16-pin diagnostic 

connectors can be found in the 


Clio: - Under ashtray - centre 

console. 

Espace: - Passenger footwell. 

Kangoo: - Driver footwell. 

Laguna: - Centre console - in 

front of gear lever. 

Laguna 2: - Centre console - 

under ashtray. 

Megane: - Driver footwell. 

Safrane: - Engine compartment 

- Near side front wing. 

Scenic: - Driver footwell. 

The vehicle's 12-pin diagnostic 

connectors can be found in the 


5,9 and 11: - Next to battery and 

ignition coil. 

21: - Centre of engine bulk 

housing. 

21 (alternate location): - Engine 

compartment - Near side front 

wing. 

Super 5 Express: - Engine 


wing. 

25: - Near side engine bulk 

housing. 

Clio Classic: - Fuse box - 

passenger footwell. 

Espace: - Under bonnet - front - 

centre. 

Twingo: - Under bonnet - front - 

centre. 

19: - Inside glove compartment. 

Laguna: - Inside glove 


wing. 

J1962 

Saab Driver’s footwell, under the 

steering column. 

J1962 

283


Seat Alhambra: - Centre console/ 

Footwell - Passenger. 

Arosa: - Fascia - Driver side. 

Ibiza, Cordoba: - Centre 

console - Driver side. 

Toledo: - Centre console. 

Skoda Favourit, Felicia (1.3), Forman: 

- Under bonnet - Suspension 

turret - Near side. 

Felicia (1.6): - Footwell - 

Passenger side. 

Octavia: - Storage compartment 

- Driver’s side. 

Volvo S/V40: - Under dashboard - 

driver’s side. 

S/V/C70: - Behind handbrake. 

850: - In front of gear lever. 

960: - Next to hand brake. 

VW Bora: - Centre console. 

Corrado, Passat: - Dashboard - 

Centre. 

Golf, Vento: - Dashboard - 

Centre (remove ashtray). 

Lupo: - Centre console, Storage 

compartment or Front ashtray. 

Polo: - Dashboard - RH. 

Sharan: - Under gear lever 

cover. 

Transporter: - Adjacent to 

instrument panel or Fuse/relay 

box - Fascia. 

NOTE: For more information, 

refer to the relevant technical 

manual. 

284 

J1962 

J1962 

J1962 

2-pin 

ISO 9141 or 

J1962

Manual Service Reset 

Service Reminder Indicator (SRI) 


On some older vehicles it is not possible to reset the SRI by using the OmiCheck. The 

manufacturers of these vehicles generally have bespoke service reset tools 

specifically for this task. However on a number of vehicles, it is possible to reset the 

SRI via interfaces built into the vehicle. The following are some of the most common 

SRI manual reset procedures. 

Alfa Romeo 

(1994 - 2000) 

1. Turn the ignition key to OFF. 

2. Press button A and keep it pressed. 

3. Turn the ignition key to ON. 

4. Keep button A pressed for about 10 seconds. 

5. The display will show ‘0’ and the spanner symbol will disappear. 

Alfa Romeo 156 

OM1104 

A 


2. Press the [INFO] button on the dashboard to enter the dashboard functions 

menu. 


and press [INFO] to select. 

4. Hold down both the [+] and [-] buttons for at least 10 seconds. 

5. The ‘Number of Miles to Service’ should now be reset to approximately 12500 

miles. 




285


Audi 

Audi A4 and A6 (1995 - 1999) 

6 

OM1029 

7 

C H 

OK 

18.8°F 

0.0MPG 

PRN 432 

UNLEADED 

E FUEL ONLY F 

A B 

1. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, press and hold button A whilst 

turning the key to the ON position. 

2. The message “Service OIL” will appear. If the message does not display, repeat 

step 1. 

3. Pull out the button B until the message is extinguished. 

4. The display should now show “Service ---”, indicating that the SRI has been 

reset. 

286 

40 

20 

0 

60 

60 80 

100 

ABS 

AIR 

BAG

BMW 


BMW 3 Series (E46), BMW 7 Series 

(E38), BMW 5 Series (E39) and 

BMW X5 (E53) BMW X3 (E83) and BMW Z4 (E85) 

OM1347 

A 

Button A arrowed in illustrations 

The Service Interval Display (SIA) can be reset using the reset button for the trip 

distance recorder on the instrument cluster 

NOTE: The distance-based inspection can only be reset if approximately 10 litres of 

fuel have been used since the previous reset was performed. The time-based 

inspection can only be reset if approximately 20 days have passed since the previous 

reset was performed 


2. Press and hold button A. 

3. Keep button depressed and switch the ignition to position I. 

4. Keep button depressed for 5 seconds, until the service status is displayed. 

5. The display will now indicate the remaining distance to service and the type of 

service required (OIL SERVICE or INSPECTION). If the remaining distance is 

displayed with ‘rSt’ then the service interval can be reset. 

6. To reset the distance to service limit press button A for 5 seconds. The ‘rSt’ (or 

reset) will flash on the display. If the reset is not required then wait until the ‘rSt’ 

(or reset) has stopped flashing before continuing. To reset press button A again 

before 'rSt' has flashed 5 times to reset the service distance limit. The new 

distance to service will be displayed for 5 seconds. 

287 

A


NOTE: For vehicles that do not include time-based inspection then ‘End SIA’ will 

be displayed with the remaining distance until the next service. For vehicles that 

do include time-based inspection then the time-based inspection status will be 

shown. 

7. The display will now indicate the remaining time to service. If the remaining time 

is displayed with ‘rSt’ then the service interval can be reset. 

8. To reset the time to service limit press button A for 5 seconds. The ‘rSt’ (or reset) 

will flash on the display. If the reset is not required then wait until the ‘rSt’ (or 

reset) has stopped flashing before continuing. To reset press button A again 

before 'rSt' has flashed 5 times to reset the service time limit. The new time to 

service will be displayed for 5 seconds. 

9. The ‘End SIA’ will now be displayed with the remaining time until the next 

service. 

288

Citroen 

Berlingo 1999 - 2002 




3. Switch ignition ON. 

4. Keep button depressed for 10 seconds. 

The display will now read ‘0’ and the spanner icon will extinguish. 

Berlingo 2002 onwards 

OM1053 A 

OM1054 

km/h 






289 

A 

MPH 

km/h


C3 




4. Keep button depressed until the display reads ‘0’ and the spanner icon 

extinguishes. 

C5 

OM1046 

OM1050 

A 






290 

A

C8 






extinguishes. 

Dispatch/Jumpy 

OM1052 

OM1051 

A 

A 

STOP 






291 

+ /-


Relay II/Jumper II (2002 onwards) 






Saxo 

OM1055 

A 

OM1045 

rpm x 100 






292 

A

Synergie/Evasion 







Xantia 

OM1051 

47673 

A 




4. Keep button depressed. The spanner icon and the service interval will illuminate 

for 5 seconds, then extinguish. 

293 

A


Xsara (1997 - 2000) 

OM1047 




4. Keep button depressed. The spanner icon and the service interval will illuminate 

for 5 seconds, then extinguish. 

Xsara (2000 onwards) 

OM1047 






294 

A 

A

Xsara Picasso 

A 

OM1048 







295


Fiat 

(1994 - 2000) 

OM1104 

A 






296

Ford 

Transit (2000) 


To turn out the Service light (spanner symbol) perform the following steps: 


2. Hold down the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal. 

3. Turn the ignition key to ON, while still holding the two pedals down. 

4. Keep the pedals pressed for at least 15 seconds. 

5. The SIA indicator (spanner) will flash when reset is complete. 

6. Release pedals while SIA indictor is flashing. 


Galaxy (2000 - 2006) 

OM1059 

STOP 

A 


2. Press button A and keep it pressed, until the display ‘SERVICE’ is cleared. 


NOTE Depending on the type of service the procedure may need to be 

performed 1, 2, or 3 times: 

OEL (Oil Change Service) - Every 7,500 Miles / 12,000 Kilometres = 1. 

IN 01 (Inspection Service) - Every 15,000 Miles / 24,000 Kilometres = 2. 

IN 02 (Additional Servicing Work) - Every 30,000 Miles / 48,000 Kilometres = 3. 

297 

mph 

km/h


GM Vauxhall/Opel 

Omega-B, Vectra-B 1999 onwards 

OM1268 




4. Keep button depressed until three dashes are displayed '---'. 

5. Switch ignition OFF to check the service request has been cleared. 

A 

298

Lancia 

(1994 - 2000) 

OM1104 


A 






299


Land Rover 

Range Rover III 2002 onwards (All Except Japan and NAS) 

OM1257 

A 



3. Keep button depressed and switch the ignition to position I. 

4. Keep button depressed for 5 seconds, until the 'SIA RESET' appears. 

5. The display will now indicate the distance to service and the type of service 

required (OIL SERVICE or INSPECTION). 

6. Check the distance to service has been reached. 

a. If yes, proceed to step 9 

b. If no, proceed to next step 

7. Press button A once. The display will show the date to service. 

8. Check the service date has been reached. 

a. If yes, proceed to step 11 

b. If no, proceed to step 10 

9. When the distance to service limit has been reached, press button A for 5 

seconds. 'RESET' will flash on the display. Press button A again before 'RESET' 

has flashed 5 times to reset the service distance limit. The new distance to 

service will be displayed for 5 seconds before the service date is displayed. 

10. Press button A once to end the service interval check and reset. 

11. When the date for service limit has been reached, press and hold button A for 5 

seconds. 'RESET will flash on the display. Press button A again before 'RESET' 

has flashed 5 times to reset the service date limit. The new date to service will be 

displayed for 5 seconds before end service is displayed. 


300

Mercedes 


Mercedes (1998 - 2007) 

With the Flexible Service System and Multi-Function Steering 

Wheel Controls 


2. Use buttons and to scroll through the multi-function display until the 

trip odometer and main odometer readings are displayed, or in the case of a 

separate main odometer display, scroll until the exterior temperature is 

displayed. 

3. Use buttons and to scroll through the multifunction display until the 

service indicator or is displayed. 

4. Press and hold button on the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds, 

until the following question is displayed within the multifunction display: 

DO YOU WANT TO RESET SERVICE INTERVAL? CONFIRM BY PRESSING R 

or 

SERVICE INTERVAL? RESET WITH R BUTTON FOR 3 SEC 

5. Press and hold button on the instrument cluster again, until a signal sounds. 

6. The new service interval will appear in the multifunction display. 

NOTE: The refers to the trip distance reset button. 

Mercedes (1998 - 2002) 

With the Flexible Service System and Without Multi-Function 

Steering Wheel Controls 

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and then immediately press the button 

next to the digital display twice within one second. 

The current status for days or distance will be displayed. 

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position within 10 seconds. 

3. Press and hold the button while turning the ignition switch to the ON position. The 

status for days or distance will be displayed again. 

4. After approximately 10 seconds you will hear a confirmation chime and the 

display will show 10,000 miles (15,000 km). Release the button. 

301


Peugeot 

106 






206 

A 

OM1056 

OM1057 

km/h 






302 

A

306 







307 

OM1058 

OM1059 

STOP 

A 






303 

A 

mph 

km/h


406 






607 

OM1060 

OM1061 

km/h 






km/h 

304 

A 

A

806 







807 

OM1062 

OM1063 

A 

A 

STOP 





extinguishes. 

305 

+ /-


Boxer II 2002 onwards 






Expert 

OM1066 

OM1062 

rpm x 100 

A 






306 

A

Partner 1999 - 2002 







Partner 2002 onwards 

OM1064 A 

OM1065 

km/h 






307 

A 

MPH 

km/h


Renault 

Oil level 

The lamp illustrated is an oil level low warning indicator and not a service interval 

indicator. When the engine oil is at the correct level, this lamp will automatically 

extinguish. 

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) 

OM1068 

OM1067 

OM1069 

km/h 

SERV 

km/h 

The lamps illustrated above, are Malfunction Indicator Lamps (MIL) and not service 

interval indicators. When illuminated there is a problem with the vehicle. Refer to 

manufacturer’s documentation for further information. 

308 

km/h 

km 

SERVICE


Clio III (models with trip computer; 2006 onwards) 

Scenic II (models with trip computer; 2003 onwards) 

OM1384 


2. Press and release display reset button A or B on the tip of the wiper lever until 

the ‘Distance Before Next’ service information is displayed. 

3. Continue to depress the button for 10 seconds until the display shows the 

distance to next service permanently. The indicator will then show the 

appropriate service interval (e.g. 6000 miles/10000 km). 

4. Release the reset button. 


Laguna (models with trip computer; 1994 - 1998) 

OM1070 

A 


2. Press reset button A until spanner icon flashes. 

3. Continue to depress the button until the spanner icon stops flashing and remains 

illuminated. 

The indicator will show the appropriate service interval (e.g. 6000 miles/10000 km). 



309 

A,B


Laguna II (2001 onwards) 

OM1071 


2. Repeatedly press reset button A until spanner icon flashes and the distance 

remaining until the next service appears in the odometer display. 

3. Press and hold button B until the display has flashed 8 times. 

4. Release button B. The new service interval is now displayed. 


Megane II (models with trip computer; 2003 onwards) 

OM1385 

A 

B 


2. Press and release display reset button A on the tip of the wiper lever until the 

service information is displayed. 

3. Press button B for 10 seconds until the display shows the next service interval 

permanently. The indicator will then show the appropriate distance before the 

next service (e.g. 6000 miles/10000 km). 



310 

B 

A

Safrane 

OM1073 




3. Continue to depress the button until the spanner icon stops flashing and remains 

illuminated. 

The indicator will show the appropriate service interval (e.g. 6000 miles/10000 

km). 



311 

A


Vel Satis 

OM1072 


2. Repeatedly press reset button A until spanner icon flashes and the distance 

remaining until the next service appears in the odometer display. 

3. Press and hold button B until the display has flashed 8 times. 

4. Release button B. The new service interval is now displayed. 


A 

312 

B

Smart 

Roadster 


Service Type Symbol 

Service A One Spanner Displayed 

Service B Two Spanners Displayed 

OM1105 

A 

1. Turn the ignition ON and within 4 seconds select the service interval display by 

pressing button A on the top of the instrument cluster (repeatedly until the service 

interval is displayed). 

2. Hold button A down and turn the ignition OFF. 

3. Turn the ignition ON. 

4. With button A held down turn the ignition ON and wait for 10 seconds. The 

service indicator will now be reset. 

5. Release button A, the type and distance to the next service will be shown. 

313


Volkswagen 

Cabrio, Golf III, GTi, Jetta III (1993 - 1995) and Jetta (1996) 

One of four service codes may be displayed on instrument panel according to 

distance travelled. Each service code displayed determines the type or level of 

maintenance required. The service code will flash for approximately 3 seconds in 

odometer display window as the ignition is turned on. When servicing becomes due 

(every 7,500 miles), the appropriate service code will flash for approximately 60 

seconds. The four service codes available for display are as follows: 

• IN 00 (No Service Necessary) 

• OEL (Oil Change Service) - Every 7,500 Miles 

• IN 01 (Inspection Service) - Every 15,000 Miles 

• IN 02 (Additional Servicing Work) - Every 30,000 Miles 

After performing the required maintenance, each effected service code displayed 

must be reset individually. For example, at 15,000 miles service codes OEL and IN 01 

will both need to be reset. 

OM1030 

A B 

1. To reset the SRI, turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 

2. Press and hold the odometer reset button A. Whilst holding button A, turn the 

ignition switch to the OFF position. 

3. Service code “OEL” will be displayed. To reset this counter, press and hold 

button B until 5 dashes appear on the display. 

4. If necessary, press the button A to display “IN 01”. To reset this counter, press 

and hold button B until 5 dashes appear on the display. 

5. If necessary, press the button A to display “IN 02”. To reset this counter, press 

and hold button B until 5 dashes appear on the display. 

6. To exit reset mode, turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 

7. When “IN 00” is displayed, turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 

314

Volvo 

Volvo 240 (1986 - 1989) 


1. Reach behind the instrument panel and push the lever located between the 

tachometer and the speedometer. 

Volvo 240 (1990 - 1993) 

OM1033 

0 

OM1032 

SER- 

VICE 

9 3 

6 

7 

1. Remove the plug from the face of the instrument panel between the clock and 

the speedometer. 

2. Insert a thin-bladed tool into the cavity and press the reset button. 

315 

0 

km/h 

MPH 

30 

20 

40 

10 

0 

20 

120 

PARKING 

BRAKE 

km/h 

005000 

mph


Volvo 740 (1986 - 1988) 

1. Reach behind the instrument panel and push the button located to the left of the 

speedometer. 

Volvo 740 (1989 - 1992) 

OM1033 

OM1031 

9 

6 




service 

9 3 

6 

316 

3 

0 

30 

20 

40 

10 

0 

20 

005000 

km/h 

mph 

km/h 

005000 

mph

Volvo 760 (1986 - 1990) 

OM1033 





Volvo 780 (1988 - 1990) 

OM1031 

9 3 

9 

6 

6 

1. Reach behind the instrument panel and push the button located to the left of the 

speedometer. 

service 

317 

3 

30 

20 

40 

10 

0 

0 

20 

005000 

km/h 

mph 

km/h 

005000 

mph


Volvo 850 (1993 - 1995) fitted with the Yazaki instrument panel 

NOTE: This instrument panel has the odometer located above the speedometer 

needle. 

OM1033 

9 3 




Volvo 850 (1993 - 1995) fitted with the VDO instrument panel 

6 

NOTE: This instrument panel has the odometer located below the speedometer 

needle. 

1. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the engine not running. 

5 

OM1034 

6 

7 

1 

Diagnostic module located in engine compartment adjacent to LH suspension mount 

2. Connect the diagnostic module test lead to terminal 7. 

3. Press the reset button on the diagnostic module 4 times in quick succession. 

318 

2 

3 

30 

20 

40 

10 

0 

20 

km/h 

005000 

mph


4. When the LED on the diagnostic unit illuminates and stays illuminated, press the 

reset button once and release it. 

5. When the LED illuminates and stays illuminated, press the button 5 times in quick 

succession. 

6. When the LED illuminates again, press the button once. 

7. The LED will flash several times to indicate that the sequence has been correctly 

entered and the SRI has been reset. 

8. Unplug the test lead from terminal 7 and turn the ignition switch to the ‘OFF’ 

position. 

Volvo 940 (1991 - 1995) 

OM1033 




Volvo 960 (1991 - 1995) 

OM1033 

9 3 

6 

9 3 

6 




319 

30 

20 

40 

10 

0 

30 

20 

10 

0 

20 

40 

20 

km/h 

005000 

mph 

km/h 

005000 

mph

Omitec 

Hopton Industrial Estate 

London Road 

Devizes 

Wiltshire 

SN10 2EU 

United Kingdom 

Tel: +44 (0) 1380 732000 

Fax: +44 (0) 1380 732001 

email: sales@omitec.com 

web: www.omitec.com

Scan Tool Operating Instructions - AK Automotive Training

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?